(Teacherscom - Library) EFL Grade 9 SB

Grade 9
STUDENT’S BOOK
Joanna Kosta
Melanie Williams
UZBEKISTAN EDUCATION FOR EXCELLENCE PROGRAM KBK 81.2Angl
English language Grade 9 74.268.1
C 83
This customized edition includes original sources owned and licensed by the Cambridge University Press. UDK 811.111(075.3)
This book was published with the support of the United States Agency for International Development's
C 83
Central Asia Office under Partnership Agreement 72011519C00004.
Ministry of Public Education, Republic of Uzbekistan 100011, Tashkent, Navoiy Street, 2a.
Uzbekistan Education for Excellence Program team: Flavia Ramos-Mattoussi, Ramin Yazdanpanah, Dina
Vyortkina, Lisa Horvath, Susan Iannuzzi, Oybek Kurbanov, Gulnoz Nadjemidinova, Azima Toyirova.
Textbook reviewers: Nilufar Tillayeva, Ruzikhon Adizova, Gyulsanem Kurbanova.
Ministry of Public Education team: Shakhboz Jurayev, Mamura Yusupova, Lola Petrosova, Bahtiyar
Perdeshov, Doniyor Pulatov, Oksana Gurchina (Review Group Core Team members), Shukhrat
Sattorov, Javlonbek Meliboev (Republican Education Centre), Mukhayyokhon Azamova and Okhunjon
Ibrokhimov (Department for working with Donors and grants).
Design and production: Amici Design.
Cambridge University Press

www.cambridge.org/elt
Cambridge Assessment English
www.cambridgeenglish.org
© Cambridge University Press and UCLES 2015, 2019, 2021
This publication is in copyright. Subject to statutory exception and to the provisions of relevant collective
licensing agreements, no reproduction of any part may take place without the written permission of
Cambridge University Press.
First published 2015
Second Edition 2019
This Uzbekistan edition published 2021
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
Printed in Malaysia by Vivar Printing
ISBN 978-9943-7472-8-9
A catalogue record for this publication is available from the British Library
The publishers have no responsibility for the persistence or accuracy of URLs for external or third-party
internet websites referred to in this publication, and do not guarantee that any content on such websites is,
or will remain, accurate or appropriate. Information regarding prices, travel timetables, and other factual
information given in this work is correct at the time of first printing but the publishers do not guarantee
the accuracy of such information thereafter.
Grade 9
STUDENT’S BOOK
Joanna Kosta
Melanie Williams
Letter from the Ministry of Public Education
Aziz o‘quvchi,
Siz qo‘lingizda ushlab turgan ushbu darslik O‘zbekiston Respublikasi Xalq ta’limi vazirligi va AQSh Xalqaro taraqqiyot
agentligining O‘zbekiston barkamollik uchun ta’lim dasturi hamkorligining natijasidir. Bu kitob sizga yetib kelguniga
qadar tahrir va moslashtirish kabi bir nechta bosqichlardan o‘tdi. Umid qilamizki, ushbu darslik yordamida ingliz tilini
o‘rganish kelajakda maqsadlaringizga erishishga xizmat qiladi.
Maroqli ta’lim oling!
O‘zbekiston Respublikasi Xalq ta’limi vazirligi
www.uzedu.uz
Dear Student,
The book that you are holding in your hands is a result of collaboration between the Ministry of Public Education of
the Republic of Uzbekistan and the USAID- Uzbekistan Education for Excellence Program. The book was carefully
selected and has gone through several stages of adaptation before landing in your hands so that it could be an
enjoyable and fun experience for you. We hope that learning English with this book will help you achieve your future
goals.
Have fun!
Ministry of Public Education of the Republic of Uzbekistan
www.uzedu.uz
CONTENTS
1 It’s a challenge! 10
2 Our changing planet 14
CULTURE National parks 18
3 On holiday 20
4 My place 24
LIFE SKILLS Critical thinking: Accepting other people’s opinions 28
REVIEW 1 30
5 School 32
6 Favourite things 36
CULTURE Secondary school in the UK 40
7 Adventure holidays 42
8 Life in the future 46
LIFE SKILLS Communication: Having a good conversation 50
REVIEW 2 52
9 Sports, games and activities 54
10 Useful websites 58
CULTURE The beautiful game 62
11 City living 64
12 Films 68
LIFE SKILLS Creativity and innovation: Brainstorming 72
REVIEW 3 74
13 Life experiences 76
14 Spending money 80
CULTURE Shopping and money 84
15 Free time 86
16 Languages of the world 90
LIFE SKILLS Learning to learn: Effective learning 94
REVIEW 4 96
17 Staying healthy 98
18 From cover to cover 102
CULTURE English literature 106
19 Different ingredients 108
20 Life changes 112
LIFE SKILLS Study skills: Taking exams 116
REVIEW 5 118
Extra activities 120

Vocabulary list 124
Grammar reference and practice 131
Irregular verb list 151
UNIT VOCABULARY GRAMMAR READING
1 IT’S A CHALLENGE! Adjectives of personality Present simple and The Duke of Edinburgh’s
page 10 Personal details present continuous Award
The alphabet Register to do the Duke of
Edinburgh’s Award
2 OUR CHANGING Geographical features Verbs we don’t usually The Earth: A changing planet
PLANET th: /θ/ and /ð/ use in the continuous Learning about the giant
page 14 Animals panda
Culture National Parks page 18
3 ON HOLIDAY Holidays: Ways of Past simple First holidays with friends

page 20 travelling Teen travel tips: Moscow
Silent letters
Holiday vocabulary
4 MY PLACE Homes Past continuous and past A new home

page 24 /iː/ and /ɪ/ simple Strange houses
Adjectives to describe
homes
Life Skills Critical thinking: Accepting other people’s opinions page 28
Review 1 Units 1-4 page 30
5 SCHOOL School subjects Comparative and New ways of learning

page 32 Word patterns superlative adverbs Clarissa’s blog
take
6 FAVOURITE THINGS Materials Possession Special memories

page 36 Adjectives for describing Weak forms: a and of
objects
Culture Secondary school in the UK page 40
7 ADVENTURE Holiday activities Present continuous for Brecon Beacons adventure

HOLIDAYS Speaking Part 2 future weekend
page 42 Things to take on an Sentence stress: present
adventure holiday continuous
8 LIFE IN THE FUTURE Furniture and household Future with will What will you put in your
page 46 appliances Future with may and time capsule?
Words with two meanings might
will and won’t
Life Skills Communication: Having a good conversation page 50
9 SPORTS, GAMES Sports and activities must, mustn’t, have to and Cool Zone Climbing Centre
AND ACTIVITIES Sports vocabulary don’t have to rules
page 54 Suffix -er must and mustn’t What are eSports?
10 USEFUL WEBSITES Relationships Verb patterns: gerunds Teen troubles

page 58 gh and infinitives Six great websites for
Internet nouns and verbs teenagers
Culture The beautiful game page 62

LISTENING SPEAKING WRITING VIDEO
A conversation about the Duke Talking about yourself
of Edinburgh’s Award
A conversation about animals An article about an

animal
Glacier National Park

A conversation with a hotel A conversation at a
receptionist tourist information
centre
Five short conversations A description of a home Homes
An interview about Describing your perfect School subjects

homeschooling school
Asking people about their Adjective order

favourite things
A conversation about people’s
belongings
High school in the US

A conversation about an Talking about an Adventures!
adventure holiday adventure holiday
A talk about an adventure
holiday
An interview about homes of too, also, as well Time capsule

the future
Five short conversations
A conversation about eSports Talking about eSports Games

and mind sports
Young app developers talk An email

about their work
Football
UNIT VOCABULARY GRAMMAR READING
11 CITY LIVING Places in a city Determiners Signs, notices and messages
page 64 Uncountable nouns the
12 FILMS Types of film Relative pronouns who, What makes a movie a hit?
page 68 Conjunctions which, that Showing today at Star Cinema
Spelling and syllables
Life Skills Creativity and innovation: Brainstorming page 72
Review 3 Units 9-12 page 74 Reading Part 1
13 LIFE EXPERIENCES Outdoor activities Present perfect with ever The great outdoors: 10
page 76 Past participles and never things to do before you’re 16
Past participles Life quiz
14 SPENDING MONEY Shops Present perfect with just, York Times

page 80 Units of measurement yet and already Pocket money
and money Intonation: questions
and statements
Culture Shopping and money page 84
15 FREE TIME Free-time activities Present perfect with for My hobby – geocaching
page 86 Collocations about having and since
fun Weak forms
16 LANGUAGES OF THE Words to describe Present perfect and past Languages of the world
WORLD language learning simple
page 90 Large numbers
Word stress in numbers
Life Skills Learning to learn: Effective learning page 94
17 STAYING HEALTHY Body parts Reflexive pronouns Accident!

page 98 Adjectives to express Teen health
emotion /uː/ and /ʊ/
18 FROM COVER TO Books and reading First conditional Signs, notices and messages
COVER Words about books Sentence stress Books to make you laugh
page 102 this summer
Culture English Literature page 106
19 DIFFERENT Words to describe cooking Present simple passive Breakfast cereals

INGREDIENTS Ways to pronounce ea The taste test
page 108 Ingredients
do and make
20 LIFE CHANGES change as a verb and noun Past simple passive Life changes
page 112 Life changes Sounds and spelling Kevin Pearce
Life Skills Study skills: Taking exams page 116

Extra activities page 120
Vocabulary list page 124
Grammar reference and practice page 131
Key to symbols:
Pronunciation Video
LISTENING SPEAKING WRITING VIDEO
World cities quiz Making requests in Favourite cities
Six short conversations different situations
A conversation about going to An invitation to the
the cinema cinema
An interview with an explorer Doing your own Life Quiz Life experiences
A conversation about a An email

birthday picnic
Famous markets
Three young people talk about An interview about an
free-time activities unusual hobby
A talk about an unusual hobby
Five short conversations Information about your Different languages
A talk about different languages English class
Five short conversations Giving advice Health
A talk about a reading A story

competition
How teens read

A talk about a cooking Talking about a recipe Favourite foods
competition
A conversation about a A biography

new school
WELCOME TO PREPARE
LEARN ABOUT THE FEATURES PRONUNCIATION
IN YOUR NEW STUDENT’S BOOK!
Practise and improve
your pronunciation
ABOUT YOU
At the start of the unit,
talk about you and
your life
PREPARE TO
WRITE
Prepare, plan and
check your writing
TALKING POINTS
Say what you think
about the topic in the
text
VIDEO
Watch interviews with
teenagers like you
8
LIFE SKILLS
Develop important
skills that you can use
in your daily life
VIDEO
Watch interesting
documentaries about
the culture topics
CULTURE
Learn about the culture of
English-speaking countries
and the wider world
REVIEW
Check your progress
PROJECT
Work together to create
something fun and
expand your learning
VIDEO
Watch teenagers doing
speaking tasks in an
exam situation.
9
1 IT’S A CHALLENGE!
Th e D u k e o f E d in b u rg h ’s Awa rd
ke new friends
This is a great way to have fun, ma
s four parts:
and learn new things. The award ha
01
to make
VOLUNTEERING – Give your time
a differenc e to peo ple’s lives .
get fitter.
FITNESS – Do some exercise and
or get
SKILLS – Learn something new –
better at something you like.
g in
EXPEDITION – Go camping and hikin
the countryside.
get a
If you complete everything, you
certifica te.
e of
Write an email to Mr Jones, The Duk
Awa rd lead er at our scho ol.
Edinburgh’s
your self and say why you wan t to
Describe
do the award.
ABOUT YOU 3 Check the meaning of the words in the emails

on page 11. Then use them to complete the
Do you have any awards or prizes? EP sentences.
If yes, what did you win them for?
1 My brother’s very . He lies in bed until
If no, do you know about any awards or prizes
midday and never does any work.
for young people in your country?
2 My grandpa’s 70, but he’s still really .
He cycles everywhere and plays tennis.
3 Sonia is very . She always thinks of other
people and is good to them.
4 Everyone likes Toby. He’s the most boy
VOCABULARY AND READING in the school.
5 Our teacher is so . She always makes
Adjectives of personality us laugh.
6 When I speak to adults, I try to be .
7 Sara is very . She smiles a lot and she’s
1 Read the poster and look at the photos.
Then answer the questions in pairs.
easy to talk to.
8 Most people in my class talk a lot, but Fred is
1 What is The Duke of Edinburgh’s Award? and doesn’t say much.
2 What kind of activities do students do for 9 I wasn’t sure how to do my project, but the
the award? teacher was very . She told me about
3 Can you do an award like this at your school? some great websites.
4 If not, would you like to do one? 10 Suchitra is very . She can paint and
draw, and she writes excellent stories.
2 Read the students’ emails on page 11 and answer
the questions with Daniel or Grace. Listen and check. Then repeat.
02
1
2
Who plays two instruments?
Who is happy with a piece of work they’re doing?
4 Write sentences about your partner using the
adjectives in Exercise 3. Give the sentences to
3 Who is preparing a surprise for another person? your teacher to read out for the class to try and
4 Who is teaching another person how to do guess who they are about.
something?
10 UNIT 1
Present simple and
GRAMMAR present continuous
1 Complete the table with examples of the present

simple and present continuous from the two emails.
To: Mr Jones Reply Forward
From: Daniel Present simple Present continuous

Subject: The Duke of Edinburgh’s Award
I often make people I’m learning to play
laugh the keyboard
I’d love to do The Duke of
Edinburgh’s Award. I’m a friendly
person and I’m popular at school. I’m funny –
2 Look at the examples in Exercise 1 and complete
the rules.
I often make people laugh, but I work hard and
I’m polite to the teachers. 1 We use the present to talk about
things happening now, around now and at
Music is important to me. I’m good at the
the moment.
guitar and I’m learning to play the keyboard.
2 We use the present to talk about
I’m a very active person – I play hockey and things that are always true or happen
go swimming every week. I’m also teaching regularly.
my brother to swim.
GRAMMAR REFERENCE AND PRACTICE PAGE 131
3 Choose the correct form of the verb.

1 I watch / am watching Spartak Moscow play
To: Mr Jones Reply Forward football every week.
From: Grace 2 What do you usually eat / are you usually eating
Subject: The Duke of Edinburgh’s Award for dinner?
3 Sorry, I can’t talk now, I’m busy. I’m practising /
I hope I can do this award. practise the piano.
I’m a quiet person – I don’t talk 4 We learned about rivers last term, and now we
much, but I’m very creative. Art is my learn / are learning about forests.
favourite subject. At the moment, I’m doing a 5 I’m quite lazy – I don’t always do / ’m not always
big painting, and it’s going well. doing my homework.
6 My dad is teaching / teaches me how to play
I like to be busy – I’m not a lazy person. I’m tennis at the moment.
also helpful. My neighbour’s quite old, and I
often go shopping with her. She always tells 4 Correct the mistakes in the sentences.
me I’m kind. It’s her birthday soon. My mum 1 It rains a lot at the moment.
and I are planning a party for her, but she 2 In my free time, I’m usually going to the cinema.
doesn’t know about it! 3 I sell my English book. Would you like to buy it?
4 Right now, I watch basketball.
5 I’m usually wearing a jacket, even when it’s hot.
6 We are swimming and sunbathing every day.
5 Work with a partner. Look at the photos on page 10.

Say what the people are doing. Then say how often /
when you do the activities in the photos.
She’s playing the guitar.
I never play the guitar, but

I sometimes play the piano.
6 Imagine you are writing an email like Grace’s and

Daniel’s. Make notes. Think of some:
• adjectives to describe yourself
• sports and hobbies you usually do
• things you are learning / planning / doing now.
Now write your email.
It’s a challenge! 11
EAST PARK HIGH SCHOOL
03
PHOTOS MESSAGES SEARCH:
HOME NEWS ACTIVITIES
YOUR LEADER: MR JONES

Today, you are going to start using The Duke of
PERSONAL DETAILS
Edinburgh’s Award part of our school website. This FIRST NAME: Grace
has all your details on it, and it shows the activities
SURNAME: Hopkins
you are doing. You can also get news and messages
from Mr Jones here. AGE: 14
What you need to do: FIRST LANGUAGE: English
• Fill in the online form with all your details.
• Choose your activities. You have to discuss and agree CONTACT DETAILS
these with Mr Jones first.
EMAIL ADDRESS: [email protected]
Here are some ideas, but there are lots more on the
ADDRESS: 44 Meadow Avenue,
DofE website:
London N24 6BG
Volunteering – helping older people, picking up rubbish
HOME TELEPHONE: 020 7946 0945
or working with animals
MOBILE: 0770 900 573
Fitness – dance, sport or exercise classes
ACTIVITIES:
Skills – playing an instrument, studying a language,
learning chess or improving your drawing skills
• You have to do each activity you choose for at least
an hour a week for three months. Take lots of photos,
and write about what you are doing. Put all this
information on the website. When you finish, you can
use it to print a book about your time doing the award.
This costs about £20.
READING VOCABULARY Personal details
1 Read the web page quickly. Who is it for? 1 Read Grace’s details. Match questions 1–7 to the
words and phrases on the form above.
2 Read the information on the website. Are the
sentences right (✓) or wrong (✗)?
EP
1 What’s your family name?
2 How old are you?
1 Mr Jones is going to put news and messages on 3 Where do you live?
the website. 4 What do you speak at home?
2 Mr Jones is going to fill in the students’ forms. 5 What numbers can we call you on?
3 Students need to talk to Mr Jones before they 6 What’s your email address?
choose their activities. 7 What’s your first name?
4 If students don’t like the ideas, they can
choose others. Listen and check. Then repeat.
04
5 Students have to spend several hours
a week doing each activity. 05 2 Listen to Grace’s contact details. Then repeat
them.
6 Students can put information about their
activities on the website. 1 [email protected]
7 Every student gets a free book about their time 2 44 Meadow Avenue, London N24 6BG
doing the award. 3 020 7946 0945
4 0770 900 573
TALKING POINTS
Which parts of the award do you think are most
useful? Why?
Which look most fun? Why?
Why is it a good idea to do awards like this?
12 UNIT 1
PRONUNCIATION The alphabet LISTENING
3 Practise saying the letters of the alphabet.
1 Listen to the conversation. What are Grace
A B C D E F G H I 07
and Daniel talking about? Who is Finn?
J K L M N O P Q R
S T U V W X Y Z 07 2 Listen again. Complete the table with the
activities the friends choose.
4 Decide which letter has a different sound
in each group. Grace Daniel Finn
1 H J U 4 K P V Skill
2 E M P 5 W X U Fitness
3 Z L Y 6 C O G
Listen to the end of the conversation again.
Listen and check. 08
Complete Finn’s contact details.
06
1 Address:
2 Phone number:
3 Email address: @facemail.com
5 In pairs, ask and answer questions using the
contact details for Sam and Jo.
What’s your email address?
My email address is
[email protected] SPEAKING
How do you spell that?
1 In pairs, ask and answer questions to complete
the form for each other. Spell your surnames.
Sam FIRST NAME:
SURNAME:
[email protected]
AGE:
289 Sandy Lane, Oxford O22 3PG ADDRESS:
EMAIL ADDRESS:
Tel 01865 995478
PHONE NUMBER:
Mob 06968 133 254
Jo
2 In pairs, ask and answer the questions.
School:
[email protected] How much homework do you get?
What’s your favourite subject?
72 Hale Street, Manchester M4 8QT
Tell me something about your school.
Mob 07473 964 443
Free time:
What do you do in your free time?
Who do you spend your free time with?
Tell me something about what you did last
weekend.
It’s a challenge! 13
2 THE EARTH:
OUR CHANGING PLANET
ABOUT YOU
What is the weather like in your country?
A CHANGING PLANET Is the weather the same every year?
VOCABULARY AND READING

Geographical features
1 In pairs, discuss the questions. Then read the

article and check your ideas.
1 How old is the Earth?
2 What’s happening to the Earth’s
weather at the moment?
2 Read the article again and choose the best

heading for each paragraph.
A Good news in one part of the world
1 Scientists believe the Earth is 4.6 billion years old.
However, the mountains, valleys, hills, rivers, deserts 09
B Problems for the planet
C The age of the planet
and forests we see today are much younger than that. D How the planet changes
For example, Mount Everest is about 60 million years
old and the Amazon rainforest is only 10 million years 10 3 Match the words in blue in the article to the
photos A–I. Listen and check. Then repeat.
old. The youngest sea in the world is the Baltic Sea, at EP
about 15,000 years old.
B
2 The Earth is always changing because of volcanoes,
earthquakes and, of course, wind and rain. Some of
A
these changes are very slow and others are quick.

Water and ice can make very big changes to the planet.
For example, glaciers (rivers of ice) can cut through
mountains and make lakes and deep valleys. Eighty or
more volcanoes are under the oceans and sometimes
they become new islands. This is happening in the E
South Pacific, near Tonga.
F
3 It’s normal for our planet to change, but at the
moment, scientists think it’s changing faster than
usual. They don’t understand everything that’s
happening, but they know that some deserts (places
where it doesn’t rain much) are growing, and many
forests are getting smaller. The weather is getting
wetter in some places and drier in others, and there are
more big storms.
4 However, these changes are not bad for everyone.
Because the Arctic is getting warmer, some people in
Greenland now own businesses and sell vegetables G
they grow on their land. That wasn’t possible so far
north 50 years ago. Farmers in Greenland like the warm
weather and hope it will continue.
14 UNIT 2
Verbs we don’t usually
4 Complete each sentence with the correct word
from Exercise 3.
GRAMMAR use in the continuous
1 Not many plants and animals can live in
because they are very dry. deserts / hills 1 Find these verbs in the article on page 14 and
underline them. What tense are they in?
2 Many have snow on top of them all
year. mountains / valleys
3 There’s a near my home, and I like believe hope know like
going fishing there. river / sea own think understand
4 There were so many trees in the that it
was impossible to see the sky. forest / lake
5 My friend and I cycled to the for a swim. The verbs above are about thinking, feeling and
lake / volcano owning things. We don’t usually use them in the
continuous form.
5 Write five sentences of your own using the words
from Exercise 3.
2 Which of these words are also about thinking,
feeling and owning things?
PRONUNCIATION th: /θ/ and /ð/
belong to buy climb feel hate
11 6 Listen to the sounds θ and ð and repeat
them. Then put the words in the box into
have love mean need prefer
run sing want work
the correct column.
north other south GRAMMAR REFERENCE AND PRACTICE PAGE 132

that there these
thing think this
3 Complete the sentences using the present simple
or present continuous of the verbs in brackets.
θ earth ð weather
1 Can you turn the TV off? I (hate) that
programme!
2 Mr Jones (want) to talk to you. Are you
free now?
Listen and check. Then repeat. 3 Why (you sing)? I (need) to
12
study!
4 That book (belong) to me. It’s not my
friend’s.
7 Write sentences about the geography of your
country.
5 I (love) this T-shirt. Can I buy it, Mum?
6 I can’t talk now, sorry. I (run).
There are mountains in the north of my country.
4 Correct the mistakes in the sentences.
8 In groups of four, listen to each others’ sentences.

Which geographical features from Exercise 3 does
1 There are things in my bag that I’m needing
at the moment.
each person talk about? 2 The weather’s cold at the moment, but I’m
D preferring it like that.
C 3 I’m thinking the party was great.
4 My brother is liking summer and I’m liking
winter.
5 Get into the pool with me! The water is feeling
great.
5 Use the prompts to write questions beginning

Do you … or Are you … Then walk around the
class and ask people your questions.
own / a bike?
learn to / play an instrument?
H I like / cabbage?
do / an art project at the moment?
think / English is easy?
plan to / do something interesting this weekend?
love / watching TV?
need / study for an exam?
In pairs, discuss what you found out.
Our changing planet 15

READING VOCABULARY Animals
1 Look at the picture below. In pairs, write down three

things you know about pandas. Read the article once to
14 1 Match the words in the box to the photos
A–J. Listen and check. Then repeat.
EP
check your ideas.
A B
2 Are these sentences right (✓) or wrong (✗)?
1 The writer helped to look after giant pandas on her trip.
2 It’s possible to find wild pandas in several countries.
3 Pandas only eat bamboo.
4 Baby pandas are very light when they are born.
5 Pandas start eating bamboo at the age of 18 months. C D
6 Scientists know exactly how many wild pandas there are.
7 It’s possible to see a panda in Mexico.
Learning about the E F
GIANT PANDA 13
When I planned my trip to China, one of things I really

wanted to do was to work at the Dujiangyan Panda Base in G H
Chengdu. I spent seven days there, looking after the pandas,
giving them food and cleaning their enclosures.
While I was there, I learned a lot about pandas. Wild pandas live
in bamboo forests, high in the mountains of central China. In the
past, they also lived in other parts of China and in Myanmar and I J
Vietnam, but they don’t any more. They spend about 12 hours
a day eating bamboo, but they sometimes eat other plants
or small animals. At Dujiangyan, we also gave them fruit, like
apples, and special panda cakes made of rice, eggs and flour
and other things.
Adult giant pandas weigh between 75 and 135 kilograms. dolphin elephant giraffe
Females usually only have one baby panda, or cub, at a time. monkey parrot penguin
The cubs only weigh about 85 grams when they are born! The polar bear snake
little cub drinks milk for about four months and then begins to tiger whale
eat bamboo. Young pandas stay with their mothers for around
18 months.
Scientists think there are now between 1,500 and 2,000 pandas
2 Answer the questions about the animals
in Exercise 1.
in the wild. This is a low number, but it’s double what it was in
the 1970s. The reason the number is going up is because of
1 Where do the animals come from?
all the work scientists are doing at places like the Dujiangyan
2 Where do they live (sea, mountains,
Panda Base in Chengdu. There are also about 325 pandas in
forest)?
zoos in a number of different countries, including the United
3 Which are dangerous?
States, Mexico, Japan and Germany.
4 Look at each photo carefully. Are
the animals in a zoo or are they wild?
5 How many other animals can you name
in English?
TALKING POINTS
What are your five favourite animals?
Why do you like them?
How often do you go to zoos?
Do you like them?
16 UNIT 2
LISTENING WRITING
PREPARE TO WRITE
1 You will hear Gina talking to her uncle about some
photos of animals. Where did he take each photo? For
An article about an animal
GET READY Underline the prepositions
15 each question, choose the correct answer. between, about, around and including
Photographs Countries in the article about pandas on page 16.
0 lion D A Argentina Think about their meaning. Which two
1 monkey B England have the same meaning in the article?
2 snake C India Complete the sentences with between,
3 penguin D Kenya about, around or including.
4 dolphin E Mexico 1 This competition is for anyone
5 elephant F New Zealand the ages of 10 and 14.
G Scotland 2 There are 40,000 African lions
H South Africa left in the wild.
3 All my friends, Tariq, are
15 2 Listen again and check.
interested in animals.
4 The zoo is closed January
and March.
5 I’ve got lots of pets, a rabbit
3 Work in pairs. Look at the photos of the two animals
below. Use the prompts 1–9 to write questions about
and two cats.
these animals. PLAN Plan your article about an animal.
Choose one of the animals in Vocabulary
1 What kind of animal / it? Exercise 1 or a different one. Write three
2 Where / from? paragraphs. Make notes for what to
3 Where / live? include in each paragraph.
4 What / eat?
5 How much / weigh? Paragraph 1 the kind of animal it is /
6 How many / left in the wild? where it lives / what it eats
7 What / babies / called? Paragraph 2 what it weighs /
8 How many babies / female have? information about its
9 How long / baby stay with / mother? babies
Paragraph 3 how many are left in the
wild / in zoos
WRITE Write your article. Try to include
the prepositions from Get Ready.
IMPROVE In pairs, compare your articles.
Can you improve them?
Sand cat
Kakapo
Our changing planet 17

CULTURE
NATIONAL PARKS
FACT FILE National Parks
tiful natural
Most countries have beau
be mountains,
places. These places can
1 Discuss the questions in pairs.
valleys, deserts, beaches,
etc. You can
1 d plants there.
see different animals an
What is a national park?
2 Have you ever been to one? everyone can
3 Can you name a national park in your country? People look after them so
4 What can you see there? enjoy them.
2 Where is Yellowstone National

Park? What do you know about it?
Read the text and check your ideas.
3 Match the texts 1–5 with the photos A–E.
w s to n e N ati o n a l Pa r k 16
Yello
A
world.
oldest national parks in the
Yellowstone is one of the

of Wyoming, Montana and
1 It is in the USA in the states
Idaho. It is also a biosphere
reserve – a special national
park
lan dsc ape s.
l plants, animals and
with interesting and unusua s loo k
men called park ranger
In Yellowstone, men and wo
.
after the animals and plants
of a very big, ancient

Yellowstone is on the site
2 supervolcano. The volcano
is 640,000 years old and its
re are large forests and som
e
landscape is amazing. The es
. The Yellowstone River giv B
trees are over 200 years old
are many other rivers. The
the park its name, but there
p valley called the Grand
Yellowstone River is in a dee
Canyon of Yellowstone.
y
the park every year and the
3 Over 3 million people visit

come to see the hundreds
of geysers. These are hot-wa
ter
enjoy
of the ground. Visitors also
fountains that come up out or go canoeing.
they can swim, fish
the beautiful lakes, where
birds
ls in the park, not including
4 There are 67 types of anima

or water creatures. There
are sheep, bison and bea rs. Yo u
e they stay in the forests and
don’t often see bears becaus park!
walk down the roads in the
mountains, but bison often
etimes
and dry, but there are som C
Yellowstone is usually cold
5
forest fires, so you have to
be careful when you hav e a
dur
picnic
ing
d. In summer, it is warm
there. In winter, it is very col d
be below 0 C. People nee
o
the day, but at night it can k.
camping in the par
warm clothes when they are
18 CULTURE
4 Are these sentences right (✓) or wrong (✗)? 5 Find words in the text that match the definitions.
1 Yellowstone is part of one state in the USA. 1 different from others (paragraph 1)
2 Park rangers protect the animals and plants 2 keep safe (paragraph 1)
in Yellowstone. 3 very old (paragraph 2)
3 Yellowstone has a famous glacier. 4 fantastic (paragraph 2)
4 The park contains very old plants. 5 travel in a small type of boat (paragraph 3)
5 The geysers in the park are popular with tourists. 6 animals in general (paragraph 4)
6 You can’t go in the water in the park. 7 a meal outside (paragraph 5)
7 People regularly see bison in the park.
8 The temperature can be very different on summer 6 What can you see on a walk in Yellowstone Park?
Make a list. Then, listen and check your ideas.
days and nights.
17 7 Listen and complete the information about two guided walks in Yellowstone Park.
Mount Washburn Mystic Falls

Leave hotel at 10 am 4
am
Transport bus bus
Lunch sandwiches, 1
and cold drinks hamburgers and chicken
Things to take a light jacket and a camera a5
Landscape you see the Grand Canyon of Yellowstone and the In Biscuit Basin there are geysers and hot-
Teton Mountains water pools and a 6 in Mystic Falls.
Animals you see 2
and maybe foxes bison
Arrive back at 4 pm 7
pm
After trip activity a3 about geography a meeting to share photos
TALKING POINTS
Which walk would you prefer to go on? Explain why.
PROJECT Description of
a national park
E Research a national park in your

country. Use the internet or books to
find out
• where it is
D • what the landscape is like
• what animals and plants there are
• what the climate is like
• why it is a national park
Present your information to the class.

Use pictures and photos to make the
presentation more interesting.
01 NOW WATCH THE CULTURE VIDEO National parks 19

A
3 ON HOLIDAY
FIRST HOLIDAYS WITH FRIENDS
F
19
G
M ost of us can’t wait to go on holiday without our parents. We can choose

where to go, what to do and who to go with. But are first holidays with
friends always great? Read about Sophie, Fred and Chris. Where did they go? Did H
they have a good time?
B
Last summer, after we finished our exams, I invited my friend Paula to go on
holiday to Greece with me. We got a flight to Athens and then we went by ship to I
the island of Milos. We were really tired when we got there, but we both wanted
a swim, so we went to the beach. You can guess! We lay down and closed our eyes
and when we woke up TWO hours later, we were
C really hot and thirsty – and red! Never again! Sophie, 16 J
My first holiday was a weekend in London. Jim, Simon and H
I travelled by tram from my house to the bus station. When
we arrived there, I put my hand in my pocket but my wallet wasn’t there!
D Where was it? I think I lost it on the tram. Jim and Simon each lent me money
for the coach. We stayed at Jim’s aunt’s house in London and we had a fantastic
weekend. Fred, 13
My first holiday was with my friend Tom at a campsite in a forest near our town.
We didn’t want my parents to drive us there, so we went by bus and then on
E foot. It was a long walk to the forest and it was raining! I put the tent up quickly
because I knew how to do it, but all our things were wet. Then the sun came out
the next day. We dried everything and had a great time! Chris, 12
K
ABOUT YOU 3 Read the article quickly and find out where
Sophie, Fred and Chris went on holiday. How did
Where do you like going on holiday?
How often do you go on holiday? each of them get there?
Do you always go on holiday to the same place?
How do you usually get there?
4 Read the article again and answer the questions.
1 What does the article mean by ‘first holidays’?
2 What did Sophie and Paula do when they arrived
on the island?
3 What happened while they were sleeping?
VOCABULARY AND READING 4 What did Fred lose?
5 How did he pay for the coach?
6 What was the weather like when Chris and Tom
Holidays: Ways of travelling
were putting up the tent?
1 Match the words in the box to photos A–K.

PRONUNCIATION Silent letters
EP by bike by boat by coach on foot
by helicopter by motorbike by plane 5 In pairs, read the words aloud. Which
are the silent letters?
by scooter by ship by tram
by underground
climb flight
guess
half
island knew two
where
18
Listen and check. Then repeat.
2 Decide whether each type of transport from

Exercise 1 moves in the air, on land or in the water. 20
20 UNIT 3
SPEAKING 4 Read questions a and b and complete the
answers. Then answer questions 1–4.
a Who did Sophie invite to go on holiday with her?
6 Look at the photos A–K on page 20. Discuss the
questions with your partner.
She invited to go on holiday with her.
b Who lost his wallet? lost his wallet.
1 Do you like these different ways of travelling?
Why? / Why not? 1 Which past simple question uses did +
2 Do you think riding a bike is difficult? Why? / infinitive, a or b?
Why not? 2 What is the verb form in the other question?
3 Do you think going in a boat or a ship is 3 Is question a asking for information about the
enjoyable? Why? / Why not? subject or object?
4 Now tell your partner which of these ways 4 Is question b asking for information about the
of travelling you like best. subject or object?
5 How do you like to travel when it’s very hot?
6 Do you prefer going on holiday to the sea or in
the mountains?
5 Choose a or b for each question.
1 Who did the boy see?

a His mother saw him.
b He saw his mother.
GRAMMAR Past simple 2 Who saw the boy?

a His mother saw him.
b He saw his mother.
1 Underline the past simple forms in the sentences.
1 Where did they go? GRAMMAR REFERENCE AND PRACTICE PAGE 133
2 Where was it?
3 Did they have a good time?
4 We closed our eyes. 6 Complete the sentences using the past simple of
the verbs in brackets.
5 Jim, Simon and I travelled by tram to the
bus station. 1 What (you / eat) when you were on
6 My wallet wasn’t there. holiday in Italy?
7 My first holiday was with my friend Tom. 2 Who (take) you to the airport?
8 We didn’t want my parents to drive us, so we 3 Where (you / go camping) last summer?
went by bus and then on foot. 4 Who (book) the flights, your mum or
9 We dried everything. your dad?
5 Who (you / go) on holiday with last
Now answer these questions. summer?
6 Who (buy) you your new bike? Was it
1 Which past simple verbs are regular? your parents?
2 Which past simple verbs are irregular?
3 Which verb never has did in questions 7 Correct the mistakes in the sentences.
and negatives? 1 I maked two new friends on my holiday.
2 Sorry we couldn’t meet yesterday. I go shopping
and then cycling with my mum.
2 Underline all the examples of the past simple in
the article.
3 It was a rainy day on Saturday, so I spended
the day at home.
3 Complete the sentences using the past simple of
the verb in brackets.
4 I watch TV and played on the computer
yesterday evening.
5 It was a pity you lefted the party early last Friday.
1 (you / go) on holiday with your family
2
last year?
They (not travel) by boat to the island
1 Where did you go on your last holiday?
because the weather (be) bad.
2 Who did you go with?
3 We (want) to visit the museum, but we
3 How did you get there?
(not have) time.
4 What did you do there?
4 (the plane / arrive) on time?
5 What was the best thing you did? Why?
5 The holiday (not be) great, but I
(enjoy) the afternoons on the beach.
6 (you / be) in the mountains for the
whole holiday?
On holiday 21
Red Square The Kremlin
READING
1 Look at the photos of Moscow. Do you know any of these places?

Read the text quickly and find out who visited which place.
TEEN TRAVEL TIPS MOSCOW

Old Arbat Aquarium
MONIQUE
21 at VDNKH
Moscow is great for sightseeing! I took photos everywhere I went. The
only problem was that I don’t speak Russian, so it was hard to get a taxi,
and I hate walking. My advice is to take some Russian lessons before you
go. I went to the aquarium on my first day. I enjoyed it, but there were
a lot of tourists. I preferred the quieter streets with little shops selling
postcards and presents. After I got gifts for my friends, I didn’t have
much money left!
CARLA
The underground, or metro, is a great way to travel around, but too
crowded for me. My favourite place was Red Square. The buildings are
Moscow Metro
amazing. But don’t spend all your time taking photos – I didn’t. I bought Yuri Kuklachev
postcards from the little shops. You don’t need Russian. Everyone speaks Cat Theatre
English. Oh, and I loved the street food and ate lots of it, but it wasn’t
cheap! The aquarium is fantastic. If you only go to one place, go there.
OLIVIA
My favourite place was Old Arbat, one of the oldest streets in Moscow.
I wanted to get presents for my mum and dad, but all the shops had the
same presents, so I didn’t buy much. I mostly ate street food because
it didn’t cost much, and it was delicious. I went to the metro to look at
the amazing stations, but I didn’t travel on it. I went everywhere on foot.
You see so much that way.
VOCABULARY Holiday vocabulary

TALKING POINTS
2 InMoscow
pairs,
For eachlook
in
at the photos
question,
Exercise
choose
1.
ofthe
Discuss
thecorrect
six places
which ones
in
answer.
you
Write M for Monique, C for Carla or O for Olivia. 1 Match the words in the box to the things in the
think look more interesting to visit. photo A–E. There are three words for A. There are
1 Who thinks walking is the best way to travel EP two words for D.
around Moscow?
2 Who found the street food in Moscow guest guidebook luggage map
expensive? receptionist suitcase tourist
visitor
3 Who says it’s important not to miss the
aquarium?
4 Who spent a lot of money on presents?
5 Which person enjoyed visiting the metro?
6 Who says you should learn some Russian
before going?
A C
7 Who said it was better to buy postcards than
to take photos?
B E
TALKING POINTS
In pairs, look at the photos of the six places in
Moscow in Exercise 1. Discuss which ones you
think look more interesting to visit.
D
22
22 UNIT 3
2 Now complete the sentences with the words from
the box in Exercise 1.
SPEAKING
1 You can find the names of streets on a
of the city. 24 1 John phones the tourist information centre
for some more information. Listen to his
2 Millions of visit Moscow every year.
conversation. What are John and his family going
3 It’s always a good idea to buy a to help
to do that day?
you plan activities for your holiday.
4 I’ve only got one small for all my
clothes. I hope I can get everything in it. 24 2 Listen again and repeat the phrases from the
conversation.
5 We stayed in a really small hotel in Moscow. It
only had room for eight .
6 We put all our in the back of the taxi. We John: Can you give me some information about
didn’t want to have the bags on the seats. the space museum, please?
7 When we arrived at the hotel, the Clerk: Yes, certainly. The museum’s near the
gave us our room key. centre, and you can book online.
8 The Space Museum in Moscow has lots of You’ll really enjoy it.
every year. John: That’s perfect. Thanks.
Clerk: It’s the best way to learn about the history
3 In pairs, ask and answer the questions. of our country.
John: That’s a really good idea. Oh, by the way,
1 How much luggage do you take with you on
have you got any information about the
holiday?
Kremlin?
2 Who packs your suitcase?
Clerk: Yes, of course. It’s all on our website.
3 What do you put in your suitcase when you go on
Have a good day.
summer holidays?
4 Do you or your parents usually buy a guidebook
when you go on holiday?
5 Do you use maps? When was the last time you used
3 In pairs, choose a city you both know. What four
places would tourists like to visit in this city?
a map? Role-play a conversation at a tourist information
6 Do many tourists come to visit your town? What centre. Use phrases from Exercise 2 to help you.
do they like to see?
7 What does a receptionist do? 4 Make questions. Then in pairs, ask and answer
them using the information below.
8 Did you stay in a hotel on your last holiday? Did
you like it? 1 address?
2 open every day?
3 what time / close?
LISTENING 4 how much / drinks?
5 web address?
1 Look at the photo in Vocabulary Exercise 1.

In pairs, discuss the questions.
TOURIST
1 What can you see?
2 Who are the people?
3 What are they doing?
23 2 Listen to the conversation between John, a INFORMATION CENTRE

student on holiday in Moscow with his parents,
i
and the hotel receptionist and check your ideas. 24 Green Street
Why is John speaking to the receptionist? Monday – Saturday
23 3 Listen again. Are the sentences right (✓) or

wrong (✗)?
Hours: 9 am – 5 pm
Coffee, tea and juice: 50p

1 John is an only child.
2 John wants to look around the city in the Come in for maps and a chat.
afternoon.
Visit: www.tourvisit.com
3 The tourist information centre is a long way from
the hotel.
4 The receptionist hasn’t got an underground map.
5 John thinks taxis are faster than the underground.
6 John forgot his bag.
7 The guest before John had several suitcases.
8 There is a lift in the hotel.
On holiday 23
4 MY PLACE
A New 26
A
ABOUT YOU
02 Watch the video and discuss the
HOME
questions.
Where do you live? Who do you live with?
How many bedrooms are there in your home?
Do you share a bedroom? Paula and Gary lived in a modern house. It had a
What’s the most interesting thing about your room? living room and a kitchen on the ground floor and on
Would you like to live in an unusual house? the first floor two bedrooms, one with a balcony and
a bathroom. Next to the house they had a garage for
their car, and they even had a small garden with a
little gate painted green. It sounds perfect!
But Paula and Gary weren’t happy. They both

VOCABULARY AND READING wanted to live somewhere more interesting, so they
started to look for a new home. They were looking
at homes on the internet one day, when Tim, Gary’s
Homes
dad, had an idea. Tim had his own lorry business
and he was selling one of his lorries. Why didn’t
1 Match the words in the box to A–K in the picture. Paula and Gary buy it and make it into their new
EP home? Gary and Paula thought this was a brilliant
idea and bought it that same day.
It was a busy year: Gary was building everything for

A
their new home, while Paula was working. He built
cupboards around the cooker and the sink and he
C even built the shower. They bought a small sofa
B because there wasn’t enough space for a big one.
Finally, six months ago, Gary finished the work

G on the lorry and they moved in. Gary and Paula
love their new home! Paula thinks the best thing
K D J is the entrance made of
I B wood and glass and
E H
Gary loves the high
F ceiling because
he’s tall.
balcony ceiling cooker cupboard
entrance first floor
garage There’s no place
ground floor lamp sink sofa like home!
25
2 Describe your home to your partner using words

from Exercise 1.
3 Read the article about Paula and Gary’s homes

and look at the photos. Which photo, A or B,
4 Read the text again. Answer the questions.
shows where Paula and Gary live now? 1 How many floors did Paula and Gary’s old house
have? What was on each floor?
2 Why did Gary and Paula want to leave their
old home?
3 What did Gary and Paula buy from Tim?
4 Who built the things for the new home?
5 When did Gary and Paula move into their
new home?
6 What do Paula and Gary like most about their
new home?
24 UNIT 4
PRONUNCIATION /iː/ and /ɪ/ 5 Correct the mistakes in the sentences.
1 I felt very nervous while we watched the match.
27 5 Listen to the two words. Which has an /iː/
sound and which has an /ɪ/ sound?
2 We waited at a bus stop when we first met.
3 We were amazed when we were finding so
sink
ceiling much money.
4 While I cleaning the kitchen, I saw the broken
6 In pairs, match the words to the sounds
in Exercise 5.
window.
5 It is snowing when we went outside.
6 I was leaving the house just after you called me.
eat feet fit he’ll
he’s hill
his it
leave live seat sit
WRITING
28
6 Look at the three pictures. Write the story

shown in the pictures using the past simple and
past continuous. Write 35 words or more.
Past continuous and
GRAMMAR past simple
1 Look at the example sentences from the text.

Find and underline all the verbs in the sentences.
Which verbs are past simple and which verbs are
past continuous?
a Gary was building everything for their new
home, while Paula was working.
b They were looking at homes on the internet one
day, when Tim, Gary’s dad, had an idea.
c Finally, Gary finished the work on the lorry and
they moved in.
2 Match i–iii to sentences a–c in Exercise 1.

i One action follows the other.
ii The actions are happening at the same time.
iii One action interrupts the other.
3 Choose the correct words to complete the sentence.
To form the past continuous, we use the present /

past simple of the verb be and the present / past
participle.
4 Complete the sentences using the past simple or

the past continuous. Sometimes more than one
answer is possible.
1 While my brother was painting his bedroom, my
sister (help) our mum in the garden.
7 In pairs, take turns to describe what you did
yesterday.
2 We (live) in an apartment for a year and
then we moved to a house. Use the past simple and past continuous with
3 My dad (cook) dinner in the kitchen when and while.
when I arrived home from school.
4 I did my homework and we (eat) dinner While I was having breakfast …
in the kitchen.
5 When Mum phoned me, I (leave) my
classroom with my friends. When I got to school …
6 While my parents (watch) TV, I was
playing computer games with my friends.
My place 25
A
READING
1 Look at the photos of the unusual homes.

What do you think they are like inside?
2 Read the article and match the photos A–D

to paragraphs 1–4.
STRANGE HOUSES
29
B
Most of us live in an apartment or in a house. Our homes often look similar
to our neighbours’ from the outside, but on the inside they can be very
different. Most of us like our homes to be cosy and comfortable, but we have
very different ideas about what that means. Some people like to have bright
colours and lots of furniture, others prefer a cool, modern-looking home.
However, some houses look very unusual from the outside. Have a look at
these four photos.
C
1 Do you like flying? Then, this
attractive house is for you.
It’s in Lebanon and is the shape of
3 In 1968, a group of swimmers
first had the idea to build this
tiny house on a rock in the middle
a plane. It’s got small windows, so of the River Drina in Serbia. It’s not
it’s not very light inside, but in a only small but, as you can see, it’s
warm country, small windows keep also not easy to get there. In winter
a house cool in summer. it can be quite cold, so people use
it mostly in summer.
2 This very unusual house is in
Mexico. It looks like part of
the rock – and it is! The walls and 4 A Japanese company
designed this football-shaped
the roof of the house are part of a house in 2006. It’s got 32 sides
very big rock. The family made the and four legs and can sit on top of D
house more than 30 years ago. We water. It’s very small but has big
can’t see inside, but it looks quite windows, so there is lots of light.
dark, cool and peaceful. What a great place to live!

1 What does the house in Lebanon look like?
Adjectives to describe
2 Why are small windows important
in a warm country?
VOCABULARY homes
3 What is the Mexican house made of?
4 How old is the house?
5 What can you find in the middle of the River Drina? 1 Find these words in the article and complete
the table.
6 When do most people use the house? Why? EP
7 What does the Japanese house look like? attractive bright cold comfortable
8 Why is it very bright inside? cool cosy dark light peaceful
tiny
unusual warm
TALKING POINTS
Which of these houses would you like to live in? 30
Why?
Which of these houses would you not like to live Opinion Size Temperature Sound Light
in? Why?
Do you know about any other unusual homes?
Tell your partner about them.
26 UNIT 4
2 In pairs, tell your partner about your home. WRITING
Use the words in the box to help you.
3 In pairs, choose one of the unusual places in the

article and decide how you can make it into a PREPARE TO WRITE
comfortable and cosy home. Present your unusual A description of a home
home to the class. GET READY Read Fernanda’s description
of her home. Which city does she live
in? How many rooms does her family’s
apartment have?
LISTENING To:
From:
Reply Forward
1 For each question, choose the correct answer. Hi, I’m Fernanda. I live with my
family in an apartment in São Paulo,
1 What is the number of Maria’s house? Brazil. It’s on the ninth floor of a big
31
block near the city centre. It’s got a
A B C kitchen, a living room, a bathroom
and two bedrooms. I share one of
the bedrooms with my sister, Luiza.
She’s 15. I’d like my own bedroom,
but it’s OK sharing with Luiza. We
like the same things and we enjoy
2 Which is Jason’s house?
talking at night.
A B C
We use pronouns instead of nouns, so we
don’t have to repeat nouns. Which nouns
do the underlined pronouns in Fernanda’s
description replace? Now replace the
underlined nouns in this paragraph with
3 What time is Jenny going to leave school today? pronouns.
A B C
David lives with his family in a small
house in York. The house is quite new
and the house has two bedrooms.
David shares his bedroom with his
baby sister, Mia. Mia is two and a half.
David’s mum, Helen, is a doctor and
4 What colour does Ben want to paint his bedroom? his dad, Francisco, is a nurse. Helen
A B C and Francisco both work at the local
hospital.
PLAN Think about your home. Where

is it? What kind of home is it? Who lives
there? How many rooms has it got? Do
you have your own room, or do you share
5 What is Sarah going to do this afternoon? a bedroom? Make notes.
A B C WRITE Write a description of your home.
Use pronouns for some of the nouns.
IMPROVE Read your description and look
for mistakes. Check that you
included all the information
from your plan and that
you have used some
pronouns.
My place 27
LIFE SKILLS CRITICAL THINKING
ACCEPTING OTHER
4 Do the quiz and choose the two best options.
Then in pairs, compare your answers.
PEOPLE’S OPINIONS How importan

t is it
LIFE SKILLS to listen?

Other people’s ideas
• can help us learn
We talk to other people and give our opinions every
• can be fun
• make life interesting day. Maybe you talk about what to do after school
with your friends, or about plans for the weekend
We should listen to other people and enjoy with your family. It’s important to give your opinions,
learning new things when we discuss opinions.
but it is also important to listen to other people’s
opinions and think about the best option. How good
are you at listening? Do the quiz.
1 Make sentences that are true for you.
always
agree with my parents. 1 When you listen to someone, do you …
agree with my best friends. a look at him/her and smile?
often
I agree with my teachers. b say, ‘That’s interesting’ or ‘That’s a good
sometimes
change my opinion. idea’?
never
like new ideas. c interrupt and give your own opinion as soon as
possible?
In pairs, compare your sentences. Did you have
the same ideas?
2
When
W hen someone has an idea, do you …
a always agree with him/her and think his/her
2 Explain why each sentence is true for you. ideas are good?
b ask questions about the idea to get more
I sometimes agree with my parents information?
because they know more than me, but c always disagree with him/her and often think
other times they are too strict. he/she is wrong?
3 When you have a different opinion to
3 Look at the words in the box. In pairs, discuss the
questions.
someone else, do you …
a ignore him/her by not listening and turning
your head away?
films
food holidays
b think about his/her opinion before you say you
h
omework music sports
don’t like it?
1 Do you talk to your friends or family about these c explain your opinion and ideas?
topics? 4 How can a group of people agree when
2 Do you always have the same opinions? they have different opinions?
They can …
a explain their reasons for their opinions.
b exchange ideas with each other by talking
and listening.
c not work together.
5
IIs
s it good to change your opinion when
you listen to other people’s ideas?
a Sometimes. I respect other people and know
I am sometimes wrong.
b Never. I’m always right and I don’t
32
like to change.
28 LIFE SKILLS c Maybe. If I have a good reason.
5 Match the questions 1–5 in Exercise 4 to the advice
a–e.
33 9 Listen again and complete the sentences with
the phrases in the Useful language box.
a It’s important to have your own opinions.
Don’t always agree immediately. USEFUL LANGUAGE
b Sometimes you can change your opinion
great idea I’m sure Yes, but
because you listen and decide another idea
I’m not sure Maybe, but
is better.
c You should be polite to other people and listen
carefully when they are speaking.
d It’s best to talk to other people when there is a Jenny: We did it last year and it was fun.
problem and think of ideas that make everyone David: (1) why not do something different?
happy. Jenny: We could go to the cinema.
e It is important to listen to other people’s David: (2) the cinema is expensive.
opinions and decide if the ideas are good or bad. Jenny: You’re right. Do you like the idea of a picnic
Don’t get angry or stop listening. Maybe they are in a park?
really good ideas! David: Yes, I do. That’s a (3) .
David: Do you think she wants to go to the park in
6 Match the highlighted words in the quiz to the
definitions. Jenny:
the centre for her birthday?
(4) that’s the best place.
David: Do you think Martha likes orange or lemon?
1 not pay attention to
Jenny: (5) . What do you think is best?
2 have the same opinion as
3
4
speak when another person is speaking
be polite to
10 Are the statements true (T) or false (F) for you?
In pairs, compare your answers and explain your
5 give and receive opinion. Be polite!
33 7 Listen to David and Jenny discussing what to do

for their friend Martha’s birthday. Do they agree in
I think …
1 football is more interesting than basketball.
the end? 2 pizza is better than pasta.
3 cats are nicer than dogs.
4 maths is easier than history.
PROJECT Planning an
exchange visit
A group of students from another country

are coming to visit your school. Your teacher
wants you to plan some activities for the
day. Prepare a timetable for the day.
• Work in small groups.
33 8 Listen again and answer the questions. • Read the situation.
1 Why doesn’t David like the idea of a surprise • Individually, think of an activity you could
party? do with the students and think of a reason
2 Why does Jenny think the cinema could be why it is a good idea.
a good idea? • Write your ideas in your notebook.
3 What’s the weather going to be like on Saturday? • In your group, decide what activities to do
4 Who will pay for the food and drink? and prepare a timetable for the day. Use
5 Who will send the invitations? the Useful language from Exercise 9 to
6 What does Jenny want to give Martha? discuss the best options.
• Make a welcome poster for the visiting
students to see when they arrive. Include
pictures and photos to make it attractive.
• Present your poster to another group or to
the class.
Accepting other PEOPLE’S OPINIONS 29

REVIEW 1 UNITS 1–4
VOCABULARY GRAMMAR
1 Write the missing letters to complete the word

for each set.
1 Choose the correct options to complete the
sentences.
0 dolphin penguin giraffe 1 I like to watch swimming competitions because
an i m a l s I’m swimming / I swim too.
1 receptionist luggage tourist 2 Of course everyone wants / want to have
h more friends.
2 land hill sea 3 The weather was really hot, but I still have / had
E a great time there.
3 tram underground scooter 4 In my town, there is / there are a lot of shopping
t centres and sports centres.
4 balcony ceiling cupboard
h Correct the mistakes in the sentences.
5 address age surname 5 I visited Thao Cam Vien zoo, but I didn’t liked it.
i 6 Every day we doing different tests or exams
at school.
2 Complete the sentences with the correct words. 7 Do you liked the competition?
1 I don’t want to go in the car to the beach. 8 I can’t go shopping today because I working.
Walking is good for us, so let’s go .
2 My parents packed our for our skiing 2 Complete the sentences. Use the present simple
or present continuous.
holiday last night.
3 Have you got a of the city? I want to 0 I really like (really like) my new bedroom.
see where the museum is. I am painting (paint) it blue.
4 We’ve got a in our apartment block, 1 I (think) that’s Olivia over there. What
but I don’t use it. I always use the stairs. (she / do)?
5 Do you ever come to school bike? 2 Sorry, I (not know) where the station is.
6 are large white animals and they live in I (come) from another town.
the cold Arctic. 3 That aeroplane (fly) very low.
7 are birds with brightly coloured I (hope) everything’s OK.
feathers. Some of them can talk. 4 My aunt (travel) a lot, but she
8 are birds too, but they can’t fly. They (not travel) at the moment.
spend a lot of time swimming in the ocean. 5 I’m sorry, I (not understand). Can you
say it again, please?
3 Read the descriptions of some nature words.
Write the missing letters to complete the words.
3 Complete the text about Gabby using the past
simple and past continuous.
0 This place is water, but has land all around it.
l a k e
1 This place is very dry. It’s hot in the day and Gabby wants to do dance for the fitness
often cold at night. part of a competition. Last month, she
r (0) bought (buy) a dance DVD, so she
2 This place has lots of trees. (1) (can) learn at home.
r
3 This place is all water and it moves all the time. But it was quite difficult because while
i she (2) (watch) the DVD, she
4 This place is low and is often between two (3) (also practise) the dance
mountains. steps. When her mum (4) (come)
l home, she (5) (say) to Gabby, ‘Why
5 This place is a kind of mountain, but it has don’t you join a dance class? It’s a much
a hole in the top. better way to learn.’ ‘That’s a good idea,’
v (6) (answer) Gabby.
30 Review 1
LISTENING SPEAKING
1 For each question, choose the correct picture. 3 Work in pairs. Make questions and then ask
and answer with your partner. Take turns to
1 What day does Antonio play football? speak.
34
A B C 1 Name? 3 Live?
2 Age? 4 Country?
4 Take turns to ask and answer the questions

in the table.
2 How much is a family ticket to the zoo today? Now let’s talk about Now let’s talk about
A B C your home. your school.
5 W
hen did your 5 W
hen do you
family move into arrive at school in
this home? the mornings?
6 H
ow many rooms 6 Which languages
3 What time does the girl’s coach arrive? has your home do you learn at
got? What are school?
A B C they?
7 W
hat colour is the 7 How many
furniture in the students are there
living room? in your class?
8 W
hich is your 8 What’s your
4 What is the number of Rosa’s house? favourite room? favourite subject?
A B C 9 Tell me 9 Tell me
something about something about
your bedroom. your classroom
5 What did Marco buy for his bedroom?

A B C
WRITING
2 Look at the three pictures. Write the story shown in the pictures. Write 35 words or more.
UNITS 1–4 31
5 SCHOOL
ABOUT YOU
03 Watch the video and discuss the
questions.
How many different subjects do you study?
How much homework do you usually get
each day?

School subjects A 36 In international tests of maths, science and
reading, students in Finland do well. This
1 Match the school subjects in the box to the
pictures A–L.
is good news! But when you look more
EP carefully at the schools, it’s not easy to
explain. Finnish students don’t start school
biology chemistry
design and technology drama
B until they are seven years old. The school
day is short, about five hours, and there are
foreign languages geography
only three or four classes a day. Students
history
ICT maths
don’t have much homework and there are no
PE physics science
exams. So, why don’t they do badly in tests?
Perhaps something else can explain it.
Listen and check. Then repeat. C
35 There is another unusual feature of schools in
2 Read the article about schools in Finland
and choose the best title.
Finland. For most of us, the school timetable
is a list of subjects, for example ICT, history,
D foreign languages, geography, with one
A Starting young
lesson following another. But some experts
B New ways of learning
believe our brains work in a different way. They
C Time for homework
say our brains don’t divide our learning into
3 Read the article again and answer the
questions. E
subjects. Our brains learn better when they
get new information in context. This is why
some Finnish schools don’t teach subjects
1 At what age do Finnish students go to
school? separately. Instead, they give students a
2 How long are they at school every day? project, such as ‘the weather’, and then bring
3 Do students have any homework? school subjects into the project.
4 Do subject words appear on all school F So how do some experts believe we learn
timetables? Bonjour!
most easily? Here’s an example of a project
5 How do some experts think our brains work? Guten
tag!
with a class of 12-year-olds. Students watch
6 In Finland, do students ¡Hola! a video re-enactment of the end of the city of
a complete a project at the same time Pompeii. Then on their laptops they compare
as they learn school subjects, or
b study school subjects and then G ancient Italy under the Romans with modern
Finland. Groups look at different parts of
complete a project?
the topic and then share their ideas. They
7 What subjects do students learn when
also use 3D printers to make a tiny Roman
they do the project on Pompeii?
building. Later, they use the pieces of the
H
4 In pairs, ask and answer the questions. building for a game. This project includes
history, ICT, and design and technology.
1 Which are your favourite subjects?
2 Which subjects don’t you enjoy as much? J K
3 Which subjects are you best at? L
I
32 UNIT 5
PRONUNCIATION Word patterns
37 5 Listen and look at the word patterns in the table. Then put the words in the box into the correct column.
0o 0oo o0oo
topic audience communicate
biology chemistry
classroom favourite
geography
history
languages science technology

38
GRAMMAR Comparative and superlative adverbs
1 Look at the adverbs in the sentences. Decide which ones are simple adverbs, comparative adverbs
or superlative adverbs.
1 In international tests of maths, science and reading, students in Finland do well.
2 When you look more carefully at the schools, it’s not easy to explain.
3 So, why don’t they do badly in tests?
4 Do students learn better when the school day is shorter?
5 When there is no exam, do students study hard?
6 Do students learn more efficiently when they study subjects or when they study a topic?
7 So, how do some experts believe we learn the most easily?
4 Write the correct form of the adverb for
2 Look at the comparative and superlative adverbs and in
Exercise 1 again and answer the question.
the adjective in brackets.
1 Laura often makes mistakes because

she always does her homework very
Which word do we often use before superlative adverbs?
(quick).
2 Hans speaks (fast) in our
3 Complete the table. class.
3 You speak English much
(good) than me.
Adjective Simple Comparative Superlative 4 Please can you speak (slow)?
adverb adverb adverb I didn’t understand you before.
bad 1
worse the worst 5 None of us did well in the exam, but I
2 3 4
the best did (bad)!
6 I think I work (hard) in English
5 6 7
the most carefully
lessons than I do in science.
8
efficiently 9 10
easy 11 12 13 5 Correct the mistakes in the sentences.

14 15
harder 16 1 You speak English really good.
2 I made friends much easier at my new
school.
GRAMMAR REFERENCE AND PRACTICE PAGE 135 3 Drama classes helped me speak
clearer and better.
4 Catch this bus and you can get more
quickly home.
5 My brother likes best the music class.
6 Work with a partner. Go to page 120.
School 33
READING
1 Read Clarissa’s blog quickly. Where is she studying

2 Read Clarissa’s blog again. For each question,
now, at home or at school? choose the correct answer.
Clariss a ’s bl o g 1 Why did Clarissa’s parents teach her at home?

A Her parents didn’t like her school.
B She was too old for her school.
C She was having problems at school.
2 What does Clarissa say about homeschooling
in the second paragraph?
A She only learned what her parents told
31 July 2018 her to.
39
A few years ago, I wasn’t very happy at B She chose what she wanted to learn.
C She studied in bed a lot of the time.
school and I wasn’t doing well in tests.
So, when I was eight, Mum and Dad 3 Clarissa preferred doing maths at home
decided to teach me at home. because
A her dad was able to explain it to her.
Homeschooling – great, I thought! I could stay B it helped her do things she enjoyed.
in bed all day! Well, it wasn’t quite like that! C she had more time to spend on it.
My parents found out what I needed to learn.
4 What was the difference between Clarissa’s
Sometimes I had lessons, but most of the time and her friends’ school experiences?
I studied things I liked and found interesting. A Clarissa didn’t have to do any homework.
That’s how homeschooling works best. B Clarissa always had more work to do than
My favourite hobby was playing computer
they did.
C Her friends enjoyed themselves more.
games, so, with Dad’s help, I began to write my
own computer programs. But I liked making 5 What does Clarissa say about homeschooling
models too, and for that I needed … maths! At in her blog?
school, maths was boring, but now it was useful A It’s important to have daily lessons.
for making my models. I made a model boat and B It’s hard to find time to see friends.
C Learning doesn’t always have to come
I needed to understand science and maths to do
from books.
that – oh, and design and technology too!
So were there any bad things about

homeschooling? Not really. I missed my friends,
but I saw them at weekends and we talked
about school! They told me about
their week at school, and I told
them about mine. Mine TALKING POINTS
always seemed more fun to What do you like about going to school?
me. Some weeks I studied What are the good things about homeschooling?
more than they did. Other What are the bad things about it?
weeks I didn’t study Would you like to study at home? Why? / Why not?
much at all. And I never
had homework!
I’m 15 now, and I’m back

at school because I need
to take exams. I don’t
mind. It’s nice to study
with my friends again.
We will extend photo in photoshop at next

34 UNIT 5 proof stage – design
VOCABULARY take LISTENING
1 What does take mean in this sentence?

I’m 15 now, and I’m back at school
because I need to take exams.
2 Now look at the mind map. Match the

meanings of take a–g to these words.
EP
exams photos/
pictures
a train take an umbrella
medicine
(the second)
turning
a subject
41 1 Listen to the What’s New section on a morning radio show.
A boy called Ethan is talking about his experience of
schooling. What phrase does Ethan use for the education
a carry e go along he had on the trip?
b make f use
c do g catch 41 2 Listen again. Are the sentences right (✓) or wrong (✗)?
d study 1 There are four people in Ethan’s family.
2 Ethan’s mum left her job because she wanted to see
40
Listen and check. Then repeat. the world.
3 Write an example sentence for each
meaning of take.
3 Ruth and Ethan were homeschooled before they went
travelling.
4 Ethan’s parents didn’t tell anyone else about their plans.
4 Complete the questions with the correct
form of the words from Exercise 2 and
5 Ruth and Ethan’s parents helped with the ‘world
schooling’.
then answer them. 6 Ruth and Ethan do a lot of different things when they are
1 When did you last take an out travelling.
with you in the rain? 7 Ethan’s parents wanted him to go back to school.
2 Which do I need take to get to 8 Ethan says he works harder at school than he did when
the park from here? The one on the left he was world schooled.
or the one on the right?
3 What extra would you like to 3 In pairs, discuss the questions.
take at school ? 1 Would you like to be ‘world schooled’?
4 Have you taken any today with 2 Would your parents be good teachers?
your new camera? How many? 3 Which parts of the world would you like to visit?
5 When was the first time you took a 4 What would you miss about your school?
to go somewhere? Were you
on holiday?
6 Do you usually take when you SPEAKING
are ill?
7 How do you feel when you take an
at the end of the school year? 1 In pairs, or a small group, use the questions to describe
your perfect school. Make notes about what you discuss.
5 In pairs, compare your answers.
1 Where is the school?
2 What lessons do you have?
3 How many students are there?
4 Who are the teachers?
5 Do you have homework?
6 How many lessons do you have in a day/week?
7 How long are the school days/holidays?
8 Do you wear a uniform?
9 What’s the food like?
10 Do you sleep there?
11 What makes your school better than other schools?
2 Now tell the rest of the class about your perfect school.
Take turns in your group to speak.
School 35
6 FAVOURITE THINGS
ABOUT YOU 5 In pairs, look around the classroom and at

what people are wearing. Find as many things
Do you have a favourite thing? What is it?
Where did you get it? as you can that are made from the materials in
Exercise 1. Say what they are.
Why is it special?
What do you like about it?
43 6 Cam is doing a project for school. He asks three
people in the street about their favourite things.
Listen to the recording. Which thing was a present?
VOCABULARY AND LISTENING

Materials
1 Look at the photos below. Match the materials in

the box to the photos A–J.
EP
cotton glass
gold leather
metal paper plastic silver
wood wool
42
2 What are the things in the photos made of?

Talk about the photos with your partner.
The headphones are made of plastic.
3 Look at the examples. Which word is a noun

and which is an adjective? 43 7 Listen again and complete the table.
The box is made of wood. It’s a wooden box. Speaker Speaker Speaker
1 2 3
4 Work with your partner. Use the materials as
adjectives to describe and find the things in
What is the thing?
the photo. Who does it
belong to?
They’re cotton T-shirts. What is it made of?
Photo B
B C D E
A
F G H I J
36 UNIT 6
GRAMMAR Possession
6 Look at the pictures and decide who the football
player is. Match sentences 1 and 2 to pictures A
and B.
1 Look at the pictures. Match sentences 1 and 2 to
pictures A and B. A B
A B
1 He’s a friend of theirs.

2 He’s a friend of hers.
1 It’s my brother’s dog.
2 It’s my brothers’ dog.
7 Complete the sentences with the correct word.
2 Look at sentences 1 and 2 in Exercise 1. Which

sentence has ’s and which sentence has s’? Why?
1 That’s not Robert’s book, it’s Paula’s. Robert lost
yesterday.
2 My parents had a holiday on a boat last summer.
3 Complete the sentences. Use the word in brackets
in the singular or plural and ’s or s’.
I think it belonged to a friend of .
3 A cat plays in our garden sometimes, but it’s not
1 That’s my (sister) car. My dad bought . We’ve got a dog.
them one to share last year. 4 You can’t use my brother’s football. But you
2 I don’t have a computer, but I use my can borrow if you like. I got it for my
(brother) when I need to. I lend him my camera birthday.
when he needs it because he hasn’t got a good 5 Are you looking for your hat? I saw Paul’s in the
one. garden, but I don’t know where is.
3 My little sister loves going to the (child) 6 Sally is so good at art. That picture is .
disco. It’s specially for little kids and there are
games and activities. 8 Correct the mistakes in the sentences.
4 Don’t put any cake on those plates! I use them 1 You can read your favourite book’s there.
for the (dog) food. They don’t like the 2 My friends name’s Ben.
bowls from the pet shop. 3 The bus stop is just five minutes walk from
my house.
4 Look at the words in purple in the two examples
from the listening. Underline the determiners and
4 Bring your computer because my is broken.
5 My bedroom is bigger than their.
circle the pronouns.
1 They’re not mine. They’re my sister’s.
2 Oh and what are theirs? Your dad’s for example. PRONUNCIATION Weak forms: a and of
5 Now complete the table. 44 9 Listen and repeat.

She’s a friend of mine.
He’s a friend of hers.
Determiners Pronouns They’re friends of ours.
my mine Is he a friend of yours?
your
his
her 10 Think of three things that are special and belong
to different people in your family. In pairs, tell each
our
other about them. Use the questions to help you.
their
1 What are they? What are they made of?
2 Who do they belong to?
GRAMMAR REFERENCE AND PRACTICE PAGE 136 3 Where did they come from?
4 Why are they special?
5 What else can you say about them?
Favourite things 37
READING
1 In pairs, tell your partner about a special present someone gave you. What was it?
A
2 Anja and Pete wrote about special memories in their online school magazine.
Look at objects A–F. What present did Anja get? What present did Pete get?
HILL CREST ACADEMY B

45
PETE, AGE 14
My special memory isn’t from very long ago. I was
ANJA, AGE 13
opening presents on my 13th birthday. My older brother
My special memory is from when I was three years old. gave me a large box. It was very hard. What could it
We were staying with my grandparents at their house be? I opened it and felt inside. I’m blind, so I needed to
in the country. They lived in an old wooden house. touch everything because I can’t see. It was smooth and
I remember the house was always cold and it was near round. I remember thinking ‘It’s a leather football’ and
a forest. When it was time for bed, Grandma took me feeling upset. I can’t play football because I can’t see
upstairs to read me a story. On my bed there was a the ball. I picked it up. It felt quite heavy, and it made
lovely wool blanket. It was really colourful. I remember a noise. My brother told me it was a special football for
touching it and it was so, so soft. ‘It’s yours. I made blind people. There are little metal balls inside that make
it for you,’ my grandma said. I still have the blanket a noise when someone kicks or throws it. Perfect! Now
on my bed at home. It looks really small there, but I play football all the time.
I remember when I was younger it seemed so big!
C D E F
Adjectives for
VOCABULARY describing objects
1
2
What was Anja’s grandparents’ house like?
When did Anja first see the blanket? 1 Match the words in the box to photos A–F.
3 What was it like? EP

colourful hard heavy large
4 Why do you think Anja remembers it as big when little lovely old pretty
in fact it’s quite small? round small smooth soft
5 Who was Pete’s present from?
6 What did it feel like?
7 Why did he feel sad when he first felt the Listen and check.
46
present?
8 What happened when he took it out of the box 2 In pairs, describe the objects in the photos. Use the
adjectives from Exercise 1 and others you know.
and why?
3 Take turns to describe something in the classroom
to your partner for them to guess what it is. Use
TALKING POINTS the words from Exercise 1 to help you.
Anja’s memory is from when she was three years
old. What’s your earliest memory?
It’s large, smooth and colourful. It’s
Pete’s memory is of his special football. What made of paper and it’s on the wall.
other special things can help someone like Pete?
A map?
Yes.
38 UNIT 6
LISTENING
1 For each question, choose the correct answer. You will hear
Carmen talking to Murat about some things she has found in her
47 grandparents’ house. Who does each thing belong to?
Things People
0 clock E A aunt
1 computer B brother
2 hat C cousin
3 toy bear D father
4 painting E grandfather
5 jacket F grandmother
G mother
2 Listen again and check
your answers. H uncle
WRITING 47
PREPARE TO WRITE
Adjective order
GET READY
THE CITY MUSEUM Reply Forward

To: [email protected]
Have you got a favourite thing or something From: Ben
from the past you want to tell us about? Send
us an email. Describe the object and say why I’ve got a beautiful, old, silver ring. It was my uncle’s.
it’s special for you and attach a photo if you I keep it in a small, red, wooden box as it’s very
have one. special. He gave it to me when I was ten.
Email: [email protected] I never wear it, but I like to look at it.
From
Ben
Read the notice from the museum and then read Ben’s email reply. What’s his favourite thing?
Put the adjectives from the email in the correct column in the table.
Adjective order
Opinion Size Physical quality Shape Age Colour Material
(pretty) (big) (hard) (square) (new) (blue) (gold)
Find three more examples of pairs of adjectives in the texts on page 38 and add them to the table.
PLAN You are going to write to the museum about something special. Use these questions to plan your email.
What is it? Where/who did it come from? What does it look like?
Plan your email to the museum.
What groups of adjectives can you use to describe your object? What order do they go in?
WRITE Write an email to the museum. Use Ben’s email to help you. Write about 35 words.
Draw a picture of the object.
IMPROVE In pairs, read each other’s email. Check for mistakes with adjectives. Rewrite your emails.
Favourite things 39
CULTURE
SECONDARY SCHOOL
IN THE UK
1 Discuss the questions with your partner.
1 Do you like going to school?
2 Why? / Why not?
3 At what age do people start secondary school in your country?
2 Work with a partner. What do you know about secondary

schools in the UK? Discuss your ideas. Read the web page.
Were any of your ideas mentioned?
The secondary school The school year

system in the UK The school year goes from September to July in England and
48
Wales, August to June in Scotland and September to June in

Northern Ireland. There are three terms and short holidays in
From the age of 11 to 16, children go to the middle of each term. The Christmas and Easter holidays are
secondary school. Most take children of usually two weeks, and the summer holiday is six weeks, or two
all abilities and are called comprehensive months in Northern Ireland.
schools. But there are also grammar schools, The school day
where children take an exam to enter,
The school day at secondary schools goes from about 8.45 am
especially in Northern Ireland. In Scotland,
to 3.30 pm. There’s a break in the morning and another for lunch.
secondary schools are called high schools
Most British school students have to wear a uniform. Each school
or academies. When they are 14, all children
has its own colours for the uniforms.
choose the subjects they want to study at
GCSE (or National 5 exams in Scotland). Sixth form / S5 and S6
These are national exams you take at 16. When students are 17 and 18, they take more exams. In
Everyone has to do English and maths. Scotland, these exams are called Highers in the first year and
Students also choose four or more additional Advanced Highers in the second year. In the rest of the UK,
subjects from a list. This includes subjects like students go into the sixth form to study four subjects at AS level
languages and sciences but also photography in their first year and three of these at A level in the second year.
and drama. You need to pass these high-level exams to go to university.
3 Read the web page again and complete the table.

TALKING
Types of public secondary schools in the UK POINTS
1
schools – These schools take children of all abilities. In groups,
2
schools – Children need to pass an exam to get in these schools. compare the UK
3
schools or academies – These are secondary schools in Scotland. secondary school
system with
Secondary school England and Wales Northern Ireland Scotland your own.
National exams at age 16 GCSEs 4
National 5 exams
National exams at age 17 AS levels AS levels 5
National exams at age 18 6

A levels Advanced Highers
School year starts September 7
August
School year finishes 8
June June
40 CULTURE
4 Read the information on the Woodedge Secondary School website. Is this school similar to your school?
Answer the questions.
Woodedge
Parents Teachers Students
Parents Teachers Students
49
Secondary School
School Diary
Important dates for November
Welcome to the Woodedge School website. We are a
comprehensive school for girls and boys aged 11–18. Our children Friday 13th: Charity Day Can
come from many different cultures and backgrounds. We are a everyone please bring £1.00. This is
a non-uniform day. Wear your own
popular school and children who come here do very well in their
clothes, but no hats, please, and don’t
exams. As well as excellent teaching, we offer many interesting
colour your hair. There will be things
after-school clubs, including sports, drama and dance.
for sale, so bring in some extra money.
All the money we make will go to the
charity Save the Children.
1 At what age do students leave Woodedge School?
Friday 20th: Autumn concert Tickets
2 Why do students need to bring money to school on 13th November?
£3.00 on sale now – maximum four per
3 Do students have to wear their school uniform on 13th November?
student.
4 How many tickets can each student buy for the concert?
5 What must students wear for the football competition? Tuesday 24th: Years 7–10 Girls’ indoor
6 Where are Year 11 students going on 30th November? football competition Sports Hall –
trainers only, please.
50 5 Listen to Aleesha talking about Woodedge School.
Answer the questions. Monday 30th: Year 11 school trip
to the National Theatre
1 How many pupils are there at Woodedge?
2 What is Aleesha’s cultural background?
3 What time does school finish?
4 What do students learn about in PDT?
5
6
What kind of food can you get at lunchtime?
How does Aleesha pay for her lunch? PROJECT A school
7 What after-school clubs is she doing this term? web page
8 What is she making for Charity Day?
Design a web page for your school. Include this
6 Compare Woodedge School with your own.
Talk to your partner about these things.
information:
• a description of the school
• after-school clubs • photos of your friends and the building
• how long the day is • a newsletter with school events for one month
• mix of cultures
Present your web page to the class.
• number of students
• school concerts
• special days (like Charity Day)
• school lunches
• school trips
04 NOW WATCH THE CULTURE VIDEO Secondary school IN THE UK 41

7 ADVENTURE HOLIDAYS
A B
ABOUT YOU D
05 Watch the video and discuss the questions.
C
What adventure holiday would you like to go on?
How would you like to get/travel there?
Who would you like to travel with?
E F

Holiday activities
G H
1 What activities can you do on adventure holidays?
Match the words in the box to photos A–J.
EP
camping diving hiking horse riding
kite surfing mountain biking paddle boarding
sailing waterskiing zip wiring
I J
51
52 2 Listen to Tara and her friend Dan talking about their

adventure holiday. Which activities from Exercise 1 do
they not mention?
52 3 Listen again. Complete the table with Tara’s and Dan’s

holiday activities.
Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday

SPEAKING
6 Work with a partner. Talk together about the

adventure activities in Exercise 1. Do you like these
4 Complete the sentences with the verbs in the box. activities? Say why or why not.
EP
get back get lost getting on 7 In pairs, ask and answer the questions.
getting to getting up Do you think:
• going sailing is dangerous?
1 Tara’s the airport by car. • going camping is boring?
2 Tara and Dan have to from the mountains to • going kite surfing is difficult?
the activity centre alone. • going paddle boarding is amazing?
3 Tara and Dan are a bus at 5 am in the • going horse riding is exciting?
morning. • going mountain biking is hard?
4 Tara and Dan are early on Monday morning.
5 Dan hopes he doesn’t in the mountains. 8 In pairs, ask and answer the questions.
5 In pairs, ask and answer the questions. 1 Which of these adventure activities do you like
best? Why?
1 What time do you get up in the morning? 2 Do you like doing activities on the water? Why?
2 When was the last time you got lost? 3 Is it better to do adventure activities when the
3 How do you get to school? weather is rainy or cold? Why? / Why not?
4 How did you get back home from your last holiday? 4 Do you prefer doing activities on your own or
5 When did you last get on a train? with other people? Why?
42 UNIT 7
GRAMMAR Present continuous for future
1 Taylor Swift sings at the football stadium
1 Look at the examples. Then choose the correct
words to complete the sentences below.
next Saturday.
2 We meet at 3 pm tomorrow, at the bus station.
3 I’m very excited that you come to visit next
We’re getting on a bus at five o’clock in the summer.
morning! 4 Do you bring any money with you this evening?
I’m not taking my keyboard with me next week. 5 I don’t visit my grandparents next weekend.
When are we going mountain biking and paddle
boarding?
PRONUNCIATION
1 We can use the present continuous to talk
Sentence stress: present continuous
about now / the future / now and the future.
2 The three example sentences are about now /
the future. 4 Look at the sentences. Decide which
words in each sentence are stressed
3 We usually / never use a time word with the and underline them.
present continuous for the future.
1 We’re going kite surfing next week.
2 Are you going mountain biking in
GRAMMAR REFERENCE AND PRACTICE PAGE 137 the summer?
3 They aren’t buying a paddle board
2 Look at Bella’s diary for this weekend. Write her
plans using the present continuous and mention
this weekend.
4 He’s going camping next month.
the day and time for each activity. Is there 5 Is she coming horse riding with us
anything she isn’t doing? this evening?
6 He isn’t going hiking during the holidays.
She isn’t cleaning her room at 2 pm on Sunday.
53
5 In pairs, take turns to read out your

sentences from Exercise 2.
4G
Saturday: 6 In pairs, write a list of all the activities you’d like

to do on an adventure week. Where would you
10.30 Go diving with Gina. like to go? Now plan your week. Choose at least
one activity for each day.
12.30 Go home for lunch.
7 Work with another pair. Use the present
continuous to ask and answer questions about
ndpa’s.
15.00 Ride my new bike to Gra each other’s adventure weeks.
party!!
18.30 Take the train to Anna’s What are you doing on Tuesday?
Sunday: On Tuesday, we’re …

m.
09.00 Go mountain biking with Mu
Choose the best activities from your group
to make a perfect week. Tell the class.
11.00 Do my homework.
This is our perfect adventure week on

14.00 Clean my bedroom.
the Black Sea. On Monday morning,
e. we’re learning how to waterski and
14.00 Watch the football gam then in the afternoon we’re …
Adventure holidays 43
READING
1 Look at the photo on the leaflet and answer

the questions.
1 What kind of place are the students going
to on their adventure weekend?
2 What activities do you think people can
do here?
2 Read the leaflet from the school quickly and
Brecon Beacons
check your answers to the two questions in
Exercise 1.
3 Read the leaflet again and answer the questions.

adventure weekend
54
1 What can the weather be like in the

Brecon Beacons?
2 Where can parents find information on what
students should bring? S tudents are going to the Brecon Beacons in Wales for our
adventure weekend in May this year. The Brecon Beacons are
mountains and the weather there can be sunny one minute and
3 Why should students not take too much in
raining or foggy and cold the next. Please make sure that your son
their bags?
or daughter brings the right clothes. See the kit list below.
4 What’s the reason for the length of the walk?
5 How many nights are students spending in It’s important students don’t bring too many clothes because
their tents? each group is going to carry everything they need for camping
6 How are they getting to Wales? and cooking.
There are lots of different walks in the mountains. We know that
some students don’t walk very much, so our walk over the two days
Things to take on an
VOCABULARY adventure holiday
is only 25 km long.
Students spend Saturday and Sunday hiking.
Students camp for one night, on Saturday.
EP 1 Match the words from the kit list to photos A–L.
Students sleep in tents in groups of three or four.
55
Listen and check. Then repeat. We are travelling to the Brecon Beacons by bus. The bus leaves
2 Read the kit list again. Which of the things on

the list do the students need for:
from the school on Saturday at 6 am and returns on Sunday at 8 pm.
Please contact Mr Jones at the school if you have any questions or
would like more information.
wet weather? eating and drinking?
sunny weather? sleeping?
cold weather? keeping clean?
KIT LIST
having fun? not getting lost?
CLOTHES OTHER KIT
walking boots backpack
TALKING POINTS waterproof trousers and towel
jacket sleeping bag
Do you like the idea of an adventure weekend
walking socks torch
with the school? Why / why not?
underwear wash bag
Do you like hiking? Why / why not?
T-shirts first-aid kit
Do you like camping? Why / why not? pyjamas plate, bowl, mug,
What else would you like to do on an sweaters knife, fork, spoon
adventure weekend? trainers (for the evening) water bottle
walking trousers (not
jeans!) YOU MAY ALSO WANT:
warm hat or sun hat
A B C D KIT FOR EACH GROUP gloves
tent sun cream
map and compass sunglasses
food playing cards
snacks
E F G H
I J K L
44 UNIT 7
LISTENING SPEAKING
1 Work in pairs. How do you say

these dates?
17th August
21st November
3rd February
Write down four other dates. In pairs, say

them for your partner to write down.
1 Laura is on an adventure holiday with her parents.
2 Read the information sheet about
the adventure holiday. What kind of
Read the conversation and answer the questions.
information are you going to listen for? 1 What are Laura and her dad going to do on Saturday
morning and Saturday afternoon?
2 What’s Laura’s dad going to do on Sunday morning?
3 For each question, write the correct
answer in the gap. Write one word or
3 What’s Laura going to do on Sunday morning?
Dad: Let’s go waterskiing on Saturday morning, Laura.
56 a number or a date or a time. Laura: I’m not that interested in waterskiing, Dad. How
You will hear a teacher telling students about mountain biking?
about an adventure holiday. Dad: I’d prefer to go kayaking or something like that.
Laura: Kayaking! That’s a great idea!
Dad: What shall we do in the afternoon? Would you like
to go horse riding?
Laura: I’d love to. Where is it?
Exciting New Dad: It’s near the beach. It’s a shame about the
waterskiing. I wanted to do that. Never mind.
Adventure Laura: Why don’t you go on Sunday morning with Mum,

and I can sleep late?
Holiday
Dad: Good idea. So, on Saturday we’re going kayaking in
the morning and …
Laura: … we’re going horse riding in the afternoon!
2 Look at the words in the conversation.

Which phrases are used:
Name: Across the Water a to make suggestions c to disagree
Start date: (1) b to agree d to express regret
Number of student places: (2) 57 3 Listen to the conversation. Then practise it in pairs.
Place: Close to a (3) 4 Read the programme for an adventure weekend. Circle
the activities you want to do.
Cost: (4) £ GOLDEN SANDS BEACH
For more information, phone:
(5) Come and join us this weekend!
SATURDAY SUNDAY
MORNING MORNING
surfing OR waterskiing zip wiring OR mountain biking
AFTERNOON AFTERNOON
climbing OR hiking tennis OR beach volleyball
EVENING Write your name on the list or
barbecue OR night walk and speak to John.
picnic in the forest
5 In pairs, talk about your weekend choices. Use Exercise 1

to help you.
Make suggestions, agree and disagree, depending on what
you are planning for the weekend.
Can you get your partner to change their mind?
Adventure holidays 45
8 LIFE IN THE FUTURE
Homes of the future
future
ABOUT YOU 2 In pairs, answer the questions about the words in

In pairs, look at the words. Imagine it’s the year Exercise 1.
2040. Describe what these things are like.
1 Which things need electricity to work?
books cars computers homes 2 Which things are furniture?
planes smartphones televisions 3 Where in a home do you usually find each thing?
3 Look at these actions. Write H (using my hands)

or T (using technology) next to each one. In pairs,
compare your answers. Discuss the technology
VOCABULARY AND LISTENING you use for actions you marked T.
Furniture and household appliances open your front door turn off the TV
turn on the computer lock the car
turn on the lights close the windows
1 Match the definitions 1–12 to the words in the box. close the garage door
EP
air conditioning barbecue
bin
bookcase drawer 59 4 Listen to a radio interview about homes of the
future. What furniture do they talk about?
fridge
heating lights roof
seat stairs washing machine
59 5 Listen again. Number the information in the
order you hear it.
1 This keeps your food cold.
2 This makes your clothes clean. a changing the temperature, music and lights
3 This keeps you cool. in different rooms
4 This is a place for things you like to read. b changes to the outside of buildings
5 This keeps the rain out of your home. c having a computer as part of a table
6 This is for cooking food outside. d homes of the future looking different from
7 These take you from one floor to another. homes of today
8 You put clothes and small things in it. e using smartphones to turn washing
9 These make it easier to see when it’s dark. machines on and off
10 This is for sitting on.
11 This keeps your home warm. 6 In pairs, discuss which things in your house
you would like to control using your hands
12 You put things you don’t want in this.
and which you would like to control without
Listen and check. Then repeat. touching anything.
58
46 UNIT 8
GRAMMAR Future with will
6 Put the words in brackets in the correct
order to complete the sentences.
1 Look at these examples from the interview. 1 Next summer, (do / I / may) an
online course on ICT. I’m not sure yet.
I think they’ll (will) be very different from today’s homes. 2 How (help / might / technology)
You won’t (will not) have to use your hands to do it. ill people in their homes?
Will it work for the heating and the lights too? 3 We (be able / not / may) to see
2 Choose the correct words to complete the rules. you tomorrow. We’re very busy.
4 I (not / might / want) robots in
my house.
1 We use will when we think something is going to
happen now / in the future.
2 We often use / don’t use ‘think’ before will.
1 A few other friends come to my house
3 After will, we use the infinitive without / with ‘to’. later.
4 We use / do not use third person ‘s’ with will. 2 I met a new friend, and I think you can
5 To make a negative, we put ‘not’ before / after will. like her.
6 To make a question with will, we use / don’t use the 3 It don’t rain this evening. The weather
auxiliary ‘do’. app on my phone says sunshine all day.
4 I’m not sure, but the book will be on your
GRAMMAR REFERENCE AND PRACTICE PAGE 138 kitchen table.
5 I meet you in the skatepark later. I’ve got
nothing else to do today.
3 Complete the sentences with the correct form of will.
1 My phone isn’t working very well. It (not be)
possible to text you later. PRONUNCIATION will and won’t
2 I think my sister (arrive) late because she
missed her train. 60 8 Listen and repeat.
3 People (use) different new technology, not only Houses will be smaller.
their smartphones. I’ll live in a big house.
4 (people / live) on the moon in the future? I don’t People won’t use door keys.
think so, do you? I won’t walk anywhere.
Future with may and might

9 Work with a partner. Use will, won’t, may,
4 Look at these examples from the interview. may not, might, might not to talk about
Seats, bookcases and things like that might not look your ideas from About you at the beginning
very different. of this unit.
But you may have a table or drawer with a computer
inside it.
10 Read the sentences. Do you think these
things will happen in the future? When?
Might our homes look different on the outside, too?
1 People will live under the sea.
5 Choose the correct words to complete the rules 2 During the summer, there might not be
any ice at the North Pole.
3 Space travel will get cheaper and might
1 We use may, might when we think something is
even cost the same as a plane ticket.
possible / definitely going to happen in the future.
4 People may travel to Mars and live there.
2 We often use / don’t use ‘think’ before may, might.
5 There will be cars without drivers.
3 After may and might, we use the infinitive without ‘to’ /
6 People might be able to communicate
with ‘to’.
with technology by just thinking.
4 We use / do not use third person ‘s’ with may and
7 Most people will live to be 100 and their
might.
bodies won’t get old.
5 To make a negative, we put ‘not’ before / after may
and might.
6 To make a question with may, might, we use / don’t use
11 In groups of three, discuss your answers.
Use will, won’t, may, may not, might,
the auxiliary ‘do’. might not.
I think people might live under the

sea in the future. What do you think?
Life in the future 47

W H AT W ILL YO U PUT
61
IN YOUR TIME CAPSULE?
A B
p in
on Harold Davisson had a sho
There is a little bag on the mo Seward, Nebras ka in the US A.
sule insi de it. The
with a time cap He thought it was imp orta nt for his
of a
capsule is tiny, about the size children and gra ndc hild ren to touch
. At the top , it says: read
small (1) and see real thin gs, not just to
ssa ges from aro und the
‘Goodwill me about them in boo ks. So he dec ided
t to the mo on by the
world brough to build the bigges t tim e cap sule in
Apollo
astronauts of Apollo 11.’ The the world. He put mo re tha n 5,0 00 real
s (2) it the re in
11 Astronaut objects inside, incl udi ng clo the s and
73 me ssa ges from
1969. There are even a new car and buried
it on 4th
(3) countries written on the t of his sho p. Then he
ers. July 1975 in fron
time capsule in very small lett heard there was ano the r tim e capsule
alle r tha n a hum an hair.
Each one is sm bigger than his, so he put a sec ond
who (4)
The messages are to anyone time capsule on top of the firs t one . His
the tim e cap sule in the future. h on
ope n the m bot
grandchildren will
Who will that be? Who (5) 4th July 2025. They know som
e of the
e from?
where those people will com things they will find , but the y mig ht find
e from Ear th, but they
They might com things Harold did n’t tell the m abo ut!
else in the
might be from (6)
solar system .
READING 3 Read the texts again and answer the questions.

Which time capsule, A or B
1 Look at the photos of the time capsules. What do you
think a time capsule is? Do you think time capsules are
1 is older?
2 is under the ground?
a good idea? Why / Why not? 3 might people open first?
4 is smaller?
2 Read both texts quickly. Choose the best title for
each text.
5 is for someone’s family?
6 has something for people to read?
1 Two are better than one 2 Out of this world
4 Discuss with your partner. Which time capsule
do you think will be the most interesting for
the people who will open it? Why?
TALKING POINTS
3 Read text A. For each question, choose the correct
answer for each gap.
06 Watch the video and ask and
answer the questions in groups.
1 A money B coin C pence What will you put in your time capsule
2 A arrived B travelled C left to show people in the future what life is
3 A usual B different C available like today?
4 A finds B looks C learns What eight things will you put in your
5 A understands B thinks C knows group time capsule? Say why.
6 A everywhere B nowhere C somewhere
48 UNIT 8
WRITING
VOCABULARY Words with two meanings PREPARE TO WRITE

too, also, as well
GET READY More than 50 years ago, some
1 Some English words have two meanings. Read the
sentences. What are the two meanings of letter?
children buried a time capsule in their
EP town. In a few years, people in the town
There are 73 messages written on the time capsule in will open it. Read one of the letters in it.
tiny letters. How many predictions does Liliana make?
Some people wrote letters to people in the future and How many of them are true now or will be
put them inside their time capsules. true in a few years?
2 Each word in the box has two meanings. What are they?
Hello,
book
kind
picture
ring
watch
I’m writing this in 1965. Here
are my predictions for 2025.
There will be cities under the
LISTENING sea and there might be cities
on Mars, too. There may not
1 Read the five questions and the possible answers.
In which questions will you hear one person speaking, and
be any teachers because robots
will teach the students. Most
in which questions will you hear two people speaking? doctors will be robots as well.
Also, I think there will be cars
2 For each question, choose the correct answer.
that drive themselves.
1 You will hear two friends talking about technology. What
62
do they think they will use in the future? Are my predictions true?
A smartphones Liliana
B smart watches
C smart glasses
2 You will hear a teacher talking about an activity students
are doing in class. What does she say? Look at the words in blue.
A They will finish the project in groups.
We use too, as well and also to add more
B They will complete the project at home.
information to our writing.
C They will write the project on a computer.
Choose the correct options to complete
3 You will hear a boy talking about his shopping trip. What the sentences.
did he buy?
1 Too comes at the beginning / the middle /
A something to wear
the end of a sentence.
B something to read
2 As well comes at the beginning / the
C something to eat
middle / the end of a sentence.
4 You will hear a daughter talking to her father about a new 3 At the beginning of a sentence, also has /
computer he is buying for her. What does she like best doesn’t have a comma (,) after it.
about the computer?
PLAN You are going to write a letter for a
A the software
time capsule for your own town. Plan your
B the colour
ideas. What do you think the world will be
C the size
like in 50 years?
5 You will hear a boy talking to his mother about the WRITE Write your letter. Use Liliana’s letter
weather for his holiday. What will the weather be like to help you and all your ideas.
tomorrow?
Write about 60 words. Use also, too and as
A It’ll be wet.
well to join your ideas.
B It’ll be cloudy.
C It’ll be sunny. IMPROVE In pairs, read each other’s
letters. Check for mistakes and try to make
your letters better.
Life in the future 49

LIFE SKILLS COMMUNICATION
HAVING A GOOD
CONVERSATION
LIFE SKILLS
To have good conversation, you should remember that:
• when only one person talks and the other listens,
it is not a conversation!
• some people are quiet, some people like talking more.
• a good conversation includes everyone.
Good
conversations
I magine you have to spend an hour with a student
you don’t know from another class. Maybe you’re
going to take a test, or you’re waiting to see the head
Group conversations are also difficult to manage
sometimes, but there are some easy ways to make sure
everyone speaks, including yourself! If you are a person
teacher. For some people, it’s a difficult situation who can talk easily, then think about the others in the
because you don’t know the person very well. For group. If you notice one person is not speaking, then ask
other people, it’s easy to start a conversation and say, them a question. A simple And you? or Why? Or show
for example, How are you? or Are you nervous? interest – Really?
Talking to an older person can be even more difficult. When you are in a group and everyone is talking at the
For example, your parents’ friends or aunts, uncles or same time, it is sometimes hard to interrupt, especially if
grandparents. Sometimes they ask all the questions you think this is not a polite thing to do. When you want
and you only answer! The best way to manage this is to to give your own opinion politely, you can use Excuse me,
think of questions to ask the other person. People like can I say something? Then other people know you have
to talk about their experiences and to give an opinion something to say.
about things.
We can all learn to have good conversations.
64
1 Are these statements true (T) or false (F)

for you? In pairs, compare your ideas.
63 2 Listen to the conversations and answer the questions.
Conversation 1 Does the conversation include everyone?
Conversation 2 Is the girl, Poppy, polite?
I talk more than I listen. Conversation 3 How does the boy stop his grandmother’s
questions?
I’m quiet, so I don’t want to talk.
3 Read the text above and tick (✓) the best sentence.
I prefer to talk in pairs than in groups. The text explains how to …
a speak more clearly.
b improve your conversation skills.
I like to hear different opinions.
c ask questions.
d make more friends.
50 LIFE SKILLS
4 Read the text again and match the two halves of
the sentences.
65 8 Listen again and answer the questions.
1 Which country is good at football?
1 To start a conversation with someone you don’t 2 Why isn’t a football a good object to choose?
know well 3 What did the children study about Russia
2 To have a good conversation with someone last term?
3 To help quiet people to speak 4 What object do they think about for Italy?
4 To give your opinion when other people 5 How many other dolls are there in Laura’s
are talking Russian doll?
a you should ask him/her questions as well
as answer. 65 9 Listen again and tick the expressions you hear.
b you should interrupt politely.

c you can ask how they feel. USEFUL LANGUAGE
d you can ask them a question.
Helping others to speak Interrupting politely
5 Complete the sentences with a verb from the box.
Find the verb in the text to check your answers.
Do we all agree? Excuse me
What about you? Can I say something?
Come on! Pardon?
answer ask
give Why?
make show speak
1 You should always in English in the

class. 10 Complete the conversation with some of the
phrases from the Useful language box.
2 I couldn’t a question in the test because
it was very difficult. Ali: I think we should choose a small country.
3 I wanted to interest in his life, so I asked (1) , Jamie?
him about his hometown. Jamie: I’m not sure. Maybe a big country is better.
4 Please sure you bring a calculator to Ali: (2) ?
class tomorrow. Jamie: Because people in the future will know
5 Can I a question? What time does the more about a big country.
bus leave? Lily: (3) ? I think it’s better to choose a
6 At the end of the video, you should your country with interesting history.
opinion. Ali: Sorry, Lily. We didn’t ask your opinion.
Lily: Thanks, Ali. Then we can choose an object
6 Do you prefer to listen or to speak? Tell your
partner about a time when you preferred to listen
from its history.
Jamie: Good idea.
and a time when you wanted to speak.
7 In Newton school, the students are working on a
PROJECT
65
time capsule project. Each group has to choose a
A time
country and an object from that country to include
capsule
in the capsule. Listen to the conversation. Which
country and which object does the group choose?
You are going to make a time capsule
that you will open in two years’ time.
• Work in small groups.
• In your group discuss these questions:
• What will you make the time capsule
with: a box, a bag, a tin?
• How will you decorate it? Will you
write anything on it?
• Where will you keep it? Remember,
in two years you are going to open it.
• What will you put in it?
Draw your time capsule and present it to
the rest of the class.
Having a good CONVERSATION 51

VOCABULARY
GRAMMAR
1 Use the correct form of get, go or take to
complete the sentences. 1 Choose the correct words to complete the sentences.
1 At our school, we exams at the end of 1 She is very good / well at climbing.
every term. 2 You have to bring a pencil and an art’s / art book.
2 Last summer, we paddle boarding 3 We meet / are meeting at 5 pm tomorrow.
when we were on holiday. It was amazing! 4 How was you / your dinner yesterday?
3 I back from school at about 5.30 every
day. Correct the mistakes in these sentences.
4 My friends sailing this afternoon at the 5 I went to the beach and swam with parents, then
activity centre. we flew a kite.
5 Our flight was at 6.00 in the morning, so we 6 I want to be a friend of him because he is funny.
up at 3.00. 7 I going to Mexico to visit Manuela, a friend.
6 the third turning on the left after the 8 We are meeting at the park at two o’clock
supermarket. That’s the quickest way to my because before that I going to the dentist’s.
house.
7 My friends lost in the mountains, but 2 Put the words in brackets in the correct order to
make sentences.
another hiker found them.
8 Next year, we can another language 1 (will / brother / study / My) drama when
and another science subject. he’s older.
9 I think I prefer kite surfing to 2 (It / not / might / snow) tomorrow.
waterskiing. 3 (may / We / not / get) lost if we follow
the path.
2 Put the words in the correct column.
4 (visit / you / Will) your grandparents at
the weekend?
air conditioning bookcase compass
5 What time (will / get / they) back?
cotton first-aid kit fridge gold
6 (I / take / may / not) my camera on the
heating leather map metal
school trip.
plastic roof silver sleeping bag
7 (might / People / share) cars in the
stairs tent torch
future.
8 What (we / will / learn) in today’s
Materials Home Adventure English lesson?
3 Complete the sentences with the correct adverb

form of the adjective in brackets.
3 Match the school subjects in the box to
the pictures 1–10. 1 Please write your name (clear) on the
exam paper.
biology chemistry drama 2 Our team didn’t win on Saturday. I played
foreign languages geography history (bad) of all!
ICT maths PE physics 3 You have to speak (loud) than that. No
one can hear you.
4 Usain Bolt ran (fast) of all the runners in
the 2016 Olympic Games.
5 Our new television works (good).
6 My dad had an accident last year. Now he drives
(careful) than before.
7 My baby brother smiles (happy) of all the
1 2 3 babies I know.
8 Fred usually gets up (early) than his
twin brother.
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
52 Review 2
PREPARE FOR THE EXAM
READING LISTENING
1
67
For each question, choose the correct answer.
1 You will hear a teacher talking to students
about a school trip. What do they need
Bill Gates to bring?

A some snacks
B a torch
Bill Gates was born on 28th October 1955.
C their walking boots
He (1) reading as a child and did
very well in maths and science at school. 2 You will hear a girl talking about her history
He went to Harvard University to study homework. What does she say about it?
law in 1973, but he (2) more time A She didn’t understand it.
B She didn’t finish it.
on computers than in the classroom. In
C She didn’t have her book.
1975, he left university without (3)
his studies and started Microsoft with his 3 You will hear a woman talking to her son.
friend Paul Allen. Microsoft grew quickly to What is she most unhappy about?
(4) one of the biggest companies A He didn’t eat his breakfast.
in the world and soon Bill Gates was one
B He missed the bus.
C He got up late.
of the world’s richest men. In 1994, he
married Melinda French in Hawaii. Six years 4 You will hear two friends talking about a
(5) , he and his wife started the Bill visit to the sports centre. What did they
and Melinda Gates Foundation because they do there?
wanted to do good things with their money. A They had a snack.
B They played tennis.
This company (6) people all over the
C They went swimming.
world with health and education.
5 You will hear a man talking to his daughter.
1 A wanted B enjoyed C hoped What’s the weather like at the moment?
2 A spent B made C took A It’s raining.
3 A closing B finishing C testing B It’s windy.
4 A go B happen C become C It’s sunny.
5 A later B soon C next
6 A sees B gives C helps
SPEAKING
2 Work with a partner. You are going to talk about the
six homes in the pictures. Discuss these questions
with your partner. Take turns to speak.
Section 1
1 Do you like these different homes? Why / Why not?
2 Do you think
• sleeping in a tent is comfortable?
• staying on a mountain is dangerous?
• living near water is unusual?
• making a home from a bus is difficult?
• sleeping in a tree house is fun?
Section 2
3 Which is better? A small home or a large home? Why?
4 Which is better? A home on land or on the water? Why?
5 Which is better? A home you can move or a home
that stays in one place? Why?
UNITS 5–8 53
9 SPORTS, GAMES AND ACTIVITIES
A B C
E F
D
ABOUT YOU
How many sports can you name?
Which ones do you do at your school?
Do you play video games?
Which are your favourites? G H I
VOCABULARY AND READING J K L

Sports and activities
1 Match the words in the box to photos A–O.
EP M N O
badminton board game
card game climbing cricket
dance class diving fishing
fitness class golf karate puzzle
skateboarding skiing video game
68
I belong to Cool Zone climbing club now! You
2 Look at the photos in Exercise 1
again. In pairs, decide which
don’t have to be a member to climb there, but
it’s cheaper if you are. Why don’t you become
activities need special
a member too? It’s really easy to join. I just had
equipment or a sports kit.
to fill in a form and agree to the club rules. I
3 Write about your favourite
sport or activity, using the ideas
didn’t have to bring a photo – they took one of
me there and made my membership card. Max
below.
number of players
CooglCeZ one
sports kit special equipment
how you play who wins
4 Read Max’s message and the

mbin ntre Rules
Cli 69
climbing club rules. Answer the
questions.
1 You must show your membership card every time
1
What sort of club is Cool you come.
Zone?
2 You must not lend your membership card to anyone else.
2
What does Max want his
friend to do? 3 You do not have to bring your own climbing shoes.
3
Can you climb? If not, would
you like to learn? 4 You must not talk to people when they are climbing.
4
What sports clubs are there in
5 You must not take photos or record videos.
your school or local area? Do
you belong to any of them? are under 12, you must climb with an adult.
6 If you
7 You must climb with a partner if you are a beginner.
8 You do not have to book if you come on a weekday.

people when they are climbing.
9 You must not stand under
54 UNIT 9 10 If you have an accident, you must tell a member of staff.
must, mustn’t, have to,
GRAMMAR don’t have to 5 Last week, there was a swimming competition. Write
sentences about what people had to do and what they
didn’t have to do.
1 Underline the examples of must, must
not, have to and don’t have to in the club
rules on page 54. Match sentences 1–4 to
meanings a–c. Use one of the meanings 0 Cost: £5 to enter the competition.
twice. They had to pay £5 to enter the competition.
1 You must do this.
2 You have to do this. 1 Arrive at the pool at 8.30 am.
3 You mustn’t (must not) do this.
4 You don’t have to do this. 2 Wear a swimming hat.
a Do not do this.
b It’s not necessary to do this. 3 You can wear goggles if you want, but it’s not necessary.
c It’s necessary to do this.
2 Underline the main verb after must and 4 Bring sandwiches for lunch.
have to. Is it the infinitive with to or
without to? 5 Last race at 6 pm. Not necessary to stay until 6 pm.
The past of must and have to is had to.
I had to fill in a form.
6 Think of eight things you had to / didn’t have to do last
week. Then ask and answer with a partner.
The past of don’t have to is didn’t have to.
I didn’t have to bring in a photo.
I had to clean my room.
GRAMMAR REFERENCE AND PRACTICE I had to finish my geography project.

PAGE 139
Did you have to … ?
3 Read the climbing club rules again and
answer the questions.
Yes, I did.
1 Is it OK for your friend to use your 7 Correct the mistakes in the sentences.
membership card? 1 The skatepark is free – we haven’t to pay anything.
2 Can you chat to your friends while 2 You must to bring your pencil case to the next lesson.
climbing? 3 We mustn’t bring food to the party – Jake’s mum is
3 Can you take photos in the club? making everything.
4 Is it OK to climb alone if you are 14? 4 When I was younger, I must live far away from my
5 Is it necessary to book if you go on a grandparents.
Monday? 5 Dad says I mustn’t help him on Saturday, so I can come
6 Can you stand under people when they to your house!
are climbing?
4 Read the dance class rules. Rewrite them

using must, mustn’t and don’t have to.
PRONUNCIATION must and mustn’t
70 8 Listen and repeat.

You must listen carefully. /məs/
1
Don’t chew gum or bring food into You mustn’t speak now. /mʌsnt/
the class.
2 Don’t talk while the teacher is talking. 71 9 For each sentence, put a (✓) if you hear must
and a (✗) if you hear mustn’t.
3 Special clothes are not necessary.
1 2 3
4
Put your phone on silent during the
4 5 6
lesson.
7
5 Don’t leave a class before the end.
6
Don’t wear street shoes inside the 71
Listen again and repeat.
dance studio.
7
It’s not necessary to call if you need
to miss a class.
8 Take off all jewellery before class. 10 Work with a partner. Go to page 120.
Sports, games and activities 55

READING
1 Look at the photos. What do you think is happening? Who do you think
the people in the photos are? Read the article quickly to check your ideas.
72
Playing a good video game is an exciting experience.

Games are full of light, sound, action and surprises, and this
makes them fun to watch as well as to play. Because of this,
more and more people are taking part in eSports. This is
the short name for electronic sports – playing video games
against other people in competitions. There are huge
tournaments all over the world, where big crowds watch
matches on giant screens, and millions more watch online.
Just like many normal sports, eSports players usually play
in teams, and have fans who follow them through every
competition. Prizes for important eSports competitions
are very large, and eSports champions can earn more than
£1 million a year. That makes it sound like a great job, but
in fact it’s not easy to be a winner. Players have to practise
PREPARE FOR THE EXAM so they don’t get much rest. The games they play change
often and there are always new things to learn.
ESports stars are not well known in the way that some
1 What does the writer say about eSports in the football stars are. However, some top eSports players now
first paragraph? work for real football teams. For example, Koen Weijland,
A They are more fun to watch than to play. a professional player of the
B They are becoming more popular. football video game FIFA, is
C Most people don’t understand them. part of Ajax, a famous Dutch
2 What is hard for top eSports players? football team. As a little boy
A They don’t have a lot of free time. he wanted to be a footballer
B They don’t make much money. and was a big fan of Ajax, so
C They get bored of playing video games. for him this is like a dream
3 What is the writer doing in the third paragraph? come true. And who
A explaining why eSports stars are not famous knows, maybe one day,
B showing how eSports and normal sports can eSports stars like him
come together will be as famous
C describing the daily life of an eSports star as today’s top
4 What is a ‘dream come true’ for Koen Weijland? footballers.
A meeting some famous footballers
B winning a video game competition
C working for his favourite football team
5 What is the best title for this article?
A Are eSports a good thing? 3 In small groups, ask and answer the questions.
B The history of eSports 1 Do you play video games? If yes, which ones?
C What are eSports? 2 Would you like to watch an eSports competition?
Why / Why not?
3 Do you know any eSports stars?
4 Do you think eSports is a good name for these
competitions? Why / Why not?
56 UNIT 9
LISTENING
73 1 You will hear a girl called Lily talking to her dad about
eSports and mind sports. Which of these words do you
think you will hear? Listen once and tick the ones you hear.
board games body brain

card games chess competition
equipment football medal prize
Olympics tournament video games
73 2 Read the sentences, then listen again. Decide if each

sentence is right (✓) or wrong (✗).
Sports vocabulary; 1 Lily explains to Dad what eSports are.

VOCABULARY Suffix -er 2 Dad thinks it’s a good idea to have mind sports in the
Olympics.
3 Lily says fitness is the most important thing for
1 Find these words in the article, then
match them to the definitions.
sportspeople.
EP 4 Dad agrees that thinking is important in sport.
1 take part 4 prize 5 Lily says some chess competitions are more famous than
2 tournament 5 champion the Olympics.
3 fan 6 professional 6 Dad and Lily both think that Olympic medals are special.
7 Dad and Lily both think that chess will be in the Olympics
a This person or team comes first in a one day.
competition.
b This person loves a sports star or team.
c This describes a person who earns TALKING POINTS
money for something most people do as 07 Watch the video and ask and answer the
a hobby. questions.
d This is a competition that includes
What board games do you have at home?
several matches or games.
e You sometimes get this if you do well in How often do you play board games?
a competition. Do you like playing chess? Are you good at it?
f This means to join other people in an Do you think that games like chess should be in the
activity. Olympics? Why? / Why not?
2 Find these words in the text: winner,

player, footballer. What do they mean?
We can add -er to some verbs and nouns

SPEAKING
to make a person. If the spelling is
vowel + consonant + vowel, you must
double the last letter before adding -er.
1 In small groups, talk about the sentences. Say if you agree
with them or if you don’t and say why. Use the phrases in
win – winner the box to help you.
If the word already ends in e, add -r
1 eSports are not sports because you don’t have to be fit
to do them.
3 Make people from these words. 2 It’s a good idea to have eSports in the Olympics.
3 Thinking and using your brain is important in every
EP sport.
clean climb dance dive
golf photograph run sing 4 Mind sports will be in the Olympics in ten years’ time.
ski swim teach work
I think / I don’t think … That’s true.
4 Make some sentences using at least one
word from Exercise 1 and at least one
I agree / I don’t agree …
I suppose so …
I’m not sure.
Maybe
word from Exercise 3. In pairs, compare I see!
your sentences.
There were lots of photographers

at the sports tournament.
Sports, games and activities 57

10 USEFUL WEBSITES
VOCABULARY AND READING ABOUT YOU

Do your friends or family ever have problems?
Relationships What kind?
What do you do when you have a problem? Who do
you talk to? Do you often try to find advice online?
1 Read the problems on the website. In pairs,
discuss the problems and think of some advice for
each person.
TEEN TROUBLES
Got a problem and not sure who to ask for advice? Write to us
and we will help! When you see this , click to hear some advice 74
from Dr Mandy, our top teen expert!
I go to dance lessons with some close friends of mine. The teacher moved me to a
higher-level group, but she says my friends have to stay in the lower level. I’m worried
about moving to a new class without them. I’ll really miss seeing them! What should I do?
Andrea, 13
I am homeschooled and I don’t spend much time with people my age. I am friends with some
of my neighbours, and I have old friends from primary school, but they often forget to invite
me when they go out. I have penfriends as well, but it’s not the same as seeing people.
Ben, 15
My best friend won’t stop copying me! I love wearing bright clothes and
looking different from everyone else. But last month my friend started buying
all the same things as me. Now we look exactly the same as each other!
Katy, 14
75 2 Listen to Dr Mandy giving three pieces of advice to the teenagers.

Write the correct name beside each number.
5 In pairs, ask and answer the
questions. Then write three more
questions.
1 2 3
1 How many contacts do you have
75 3 Listen again and make notes about the advice for each person.
Was any of the advice the same as yours?
online?
2 Are you friendly with your
4 Match the people 1–10 to the descriptions a–j. neighbours?
3 How many of your relatives live
EP 1 guest a Y ou live near this person. near you?
2 old friend b This person is a visitor in your home. 4 Who do you miss when you go
3 neighbour c You have this person’s details in your phone or online. away on holiday?
4 close friend d This person belongs to a group or club.
5 member e You like this person very much and you know each 6 With a different partner, ask
and answer your new questions
6 contact other well.
7 best friend f You met this person a long time ago. together.
8 classmate g This person is part of your family.
9 penfriend h This is your one special friend.
10 relative i You study with this person.
j You don’t meet this person, but you write to them.
76
58 UNIT 10
PRONUNCIATION gh 3 Choose the correct form of the verb. In one
sentence, both forms are possible.
77 7 Listen to the words and repeat them. Then

put them into the correct column.
1 My friend decided buy / to buy a new pair
of sunglasses.
2 Wait/ Waiting for people makes me angry.
bright
caught daughter 3 I helped the teacher by carry / carrying
enough flight neighbour her books.
right
straight thought 4 One day, I hope to be / being a doctor.
5 Swim / Swimming in the sea on a hot day
is lovely.
/aɪ/ /eɪ/ /ʌf/ /ɔ:/ 6 I don’t mind to sit / sitting by the window.
night eight rough bought 7 I think to run / running is the best kind of
exercise.
8 Everyone loves to get / getting presents!
9 I’m thinking of get / getting a new poster for
my room.
10 Saving / Save a bit of pocket money every
Listen and check. Then repeat. week is a really good idea.
78

1 I hope see you very soon, and I hope that you
like my mobile phone.
Verb patterns: gerunds
GRAMMAR and infinitives
2 I want write about my life.
3 I like play computer games best.
4 You can get to my house taking the number
1 Look at the example sentences. Then complete
the rules about verb patterns.
6 bus.
5 I think it’s better to finish study before we go out.
6 Would you mind come with me to the shops?
I’m worried about moving to a new class.
You’ll get better at dancing.
Thank you for writing to the website.
5 Complete each sentence with a verb from the box
in the gerund or infinitive.
Try to talk to her about how you feel.
If you decide to do this, you can give her advice. chat
come eat
go improve
They often forget to invite me when they go out. pass
play
spend watch make
My best friend won’t stop copying me.
1 We need a cake, but we don’t know
I’ll really miss seeing them.
how to do it.
2 chocolate isn’t very good for you.
1 We use the gerund (-ing form) after
3 I need the marks I get in maths. Mine
prepositions: about , ,
are terrible.
(also by, of, with, etc.)
4 TV late at night makes you tired the
2 We use the infinitive + to after some verbs:
next day.
try , , (also choose,
5 I’m angry with my neighbour for his
learn, hope, plan, need, want)
music really late at night.
3 We can use the gerund after some verbs:
6 my exam is very important to me.
stop , (also finish, don’t mind)
7 Jack didn’t want to my party.
4 We can use either the gerund or the infinitive
8 with friends is really good fun.
after these verbs: start, begin, enjoy, like,
9 My best friend spends all her free time
love, prefer.
to the shops with the new girl in our class.
10 a lot of time indoors is quite boring.
2 Look at three more examples. What form do we
use when the verb is the subject of a sentence? 6 In groups of three, each person writes a few
sentences about a problem. Listen to each other’s
Studying alone isn’t easy. problems and give advice. Who has the most
Leaving your friends behind is difficult. interesting problem? Who gives the best advice?
Waiting for them to contact you first isn’t always
a good idea.
Useful websites 59
READING 79
SIEXAT WEBSITES
1 Tick (✓) the things you use websites and apps for.
playing games
watching videos
R
GR
chatting to friends
finding information
doing schoolwork
reading articles
FOR TEENAGERS
listening to music
sharing photos, stories, etc. A EcoCentral
2 What are your three favourite websites or apps? In
pairs, compare your answers.
This site is all about loo
king after the Earth.
t different animals as
There are facts abou
out forests, deserts
well as information ab
3 Read what the people say. Which of the activities
in Exercise 1 do they want to do? and oceans. You can
upload your own video
s
one to see.
onto the site for every
1
I’m working on a project about the
human body at the moment and I’m
B TeenPress
interested in learning about animals. I This is one of the best sites on the
web for teenagers who love writing.
like having fun online too.
You can share your work with others,
and there is a message board where
you can chat about things that are
important to you.
2
I’m hoping to become a writer
one day. I’d like to put my sto
ries C ChannelTwenty
online and discuss ideas wit h watch a daily news
On this site, you can t
h for information abou
people my age. programme and searc
are also videos on
big news stories. There
icles about famous
different subjects, art
mpetitions. The app is
3 bands, games and co .
I like to know what is kinds of smartphones
free and works on all
happening in the world. I’m
also interested in music and D ScienceZone
would like to learn more
about my favourite stars. There’s lots of information on this site
about maths, chemistry and biology.
You can ‘visit’ some of the world’s most
famous museums and watch wildlife via
webcams. There are also some very cool
I’m interested in nature and wildlife and 4 games, such as Save the Planet.
want to learn about ways to help the
planet. I like making short films and want
to share them with others.
E Tune-in you to
songs on this site for
There are millions of your
online. You can save
download or listen to If you’re in a band,
ur own lis t.
4 Read about six websites and decide which is best
for each person. In pairs, compare your answers.
favourite songs in yo
you can record your mu
sic and upload it. The
menu is easy to
website is large, but the
with it is excellent.
use. The app that goes
F Inside-the-cover
Finding out about your favourite writers is easy
on this site. There are lots of interesting articles
and information about the latest books. You
can read blogs by well-known writers and post
questions and messages to
them. There are links to
60 UNIT 10 other sites too.
VOCABULARY Internet nouns and verbs LISTENING
1 Look at the words in the texts on page 60. Find six
nouns and six verbs. 81 1 Listen to three young app developers talking
EP about their work. Match each speaker to what the
Match the nouns to definitions 1–6. app they made helps you do.
1 This is all the pages online that you can visit. Speaker 1 a use your time well
2 You can write things here for others to read and Speaker 2 b learn things
reply to. Speaker 3 c play games
3 If you click on these, they take you to another
website. 81 2 Listen again and complete the table.
4 This is another way of saying ‘website’.
Speaker
5 These are online diaries.
6 You look at this list to choose which part of a 1 2 3
website to visit. How old was each person when
they wrote their first app?
Use the verbs to complete the sentences.
How much is it?
7 You can a short voice message and then How many people download it
share it with friends. per week?
8 You can for information online by What can you do on the app?
typing a word into a box.
9 You can a message or question on the
internet for others to read. WRITING
10 You can a file from your computer onto
a website.
11 You can a file from the internet to your PREPARE TO WRITE
computer.
An email
12 You can a document or other file on
your computer so you don’t lose it. GET READY Count how many times these phrases
Listen and check. Then repeat. are used to start sentences in the texts in Reading
80
Exercise 4. Then find three other ways of starting
sentences in the texts.
1 There is / There are …
2 You can …
2 For each question, choose the correct answer. 3 This …
PLAN You are going to reply to this email from
your penfriend.
Catherine Cook
Catherine Cook was only 15 when she Reply Forward
To:
started myYearbook.com. She had the idea of From: Sal
creating a new (1) to help people find
friends. She also had lots of great ideas about Tell me about your favourite website or app.
how to make myYearbook.com different from
What’s it called? What can you do on it? Why
everything else on the (2) .
do you like it?
myYearbook.com is now called MeetMe.com.
When you join, you fill in a form and (3) Make notes to help you answer each question.
a photo of yourself to the site. After that, you WRITE Write your email. Use the descriptions of
can start (4) for friends to add. It’s the websites in Reading Exercise 4 to help you. Try
not difficult to explore the site and (5)
to begin each sentence with a di erent phrase.
people. You can play games, post (6) , do
quizzes and more. It’s available on the web and as Begin Dear Sal, and end with your name.
an app. IMPROVE In pairs, read each other’s emails. Check
that you both included all the information from
1 A website B computer C file your plan and that you started each sentence with
2 A information B link C internet
a di erent phrase.
3 A record B upload C copy
4 A searching B finding C missing
5 A talk B contact C speak
6 A screens B menus C messages
Useful websites 61
CULTURE
THE BEAUTIFUL GAME
1 Discuss the questions with your partner.
2 What can you see in the photos?
1 Do you like playing or watching football? Read the text and check your
2 Do many girls and women play football in your country? ideas. Match the photos A–D to the
3 Do you ever watch girls or women playing football on TV or live? paragraphs 1–4.
A SPORT FOR ALL ? 82
1 In 1920, there was a match between two women’s football 3 Nowadays, nearly three million girls
teams at Everton’s football ground in Liverpool. Around 53,000 and women play football in the UK, and there
people went to watch it! Just a few years earlier, during the First are 100,000 registered players who can play
World War, many men were fighting abroad. This meant there were official tournaments. There are only about 200
no football players and no important games. People loved the sport professional players, and many have to do
and wanted to watch it, so women started to play. Some of the other work to earn enough money, but you can
best players, such as Lily Parr, are still famous today. She became often see women’s football on television. They
famous when she was only 14 and scored 43 goals in one season. sometimes play in really famous places, such
2 as Wembley Stadium in London.
A year later, in 1921, the Football Association (FA) decided
to stop women’s football because they thought it was not a sport 4 In schools, girls and boys play football
that women should play for payment. Fifty years later, in 1971, in the playground – there are teams with both
women could finally play football as a profession and not just boy and girl players. Recently, all-girl teams
as a hobby. However, it wasn’t until 1993 that the English FA are playing against all-boy teams. So football is
recognised international women’s football. After that, women could really a sport for everyone!
play in competitions with other countries.
B
A
62 CULTURE
3 Read the text again and answer the questions.
1 How many people went to watch the women’s football match in Liverpool in 1920?
2 Why did many women start playing football during the First World War?
3 Why did women stop playing football after 1921?
4 When did the Football Association in England allow women to play in international competitions?
5 Do professional women players receive a lot of money nowadays?
6 Do boys and girls always play in separate football teams?
4 Match the highlighted words in the text to the definitions.

1 three words for a place or places where people can play football
2 two words for football competitions
3 one word that means ‘job’
TALKING POINTS
Are some sports in your country only for girls or only for boys?
Which ones are played only by girls or only by boys?
5 Look at the table about different types of football. In pairs, try to complete the gaps.
When people first Number of Indoors or Where people

played it players outdoors play it most
Table football 1
Usually two or four Indoors Europe and the USA
Futsal 1930 ten (five in each 2
South America and
team) 3
FIFA video game 4

Maximum 8 5
All over the world
Football for the blind 1920s 6
Both indoors and 7
outdoors
83
Listen and check. Complete the information you didn’t know.
D
PROJECT The history
of a sport
Find out about the history of a sport in

your country. Make a poster to present
the information to the class. Use pictures
and photos to make the poster more
interesting. Include information about:
• when and where it started
• who plays the sport: only men, only
women or both
• some famous teams or players
• what competitions there are for
this sport
Present your poster to the class.
08 NOW WATCH THE CULTURE VIDEO The beautiful game 63

11 CITY LIVING
A B
ABOUT YOU
What are the three biggest cities in your country?
What are they famous for?
What’s good or bad about living in cities?
G
F
C D E
I
H J
K L
VOCABULARY AND LISTENING 3 In pairs, talk about the city where you live, or your
capital city. What things from Exercises 1 and 2
does it have? What are their names?
Places in a city
4 What countries are these cities in? Which are
1 Think about what can you do at the places in the

box. Write five questions. Then test your partner.
capital cities? What are they famous for?
Beijing Cairo London Madrid

café church hospital library Mexico City Mumbai New Delhi
museum park police station New York Paris Rio de Janeiro
post office restaurant shop Rome San Francisco Tokyo
sports centre theatre train station
university
85 5 Listen to the quiz. Match the questions to the
names of the cities.
Where do you go to buy a stamp? Question 1 Mumbai
Question 2 Tokyo
A post office. What do you use a bridge for? Question 3 Rio de Janeiro
Question 4 Paris
2 Match the words in the box to photos A–L. Question 5
Question 6
New York
Beijing
EP
art gallery
fountain
cathedral
mosque
embassy
old town palace
85 6 Read the sentences and write the name of the city.
Then listen again and check.
shopping area skyscraper stadium 1 It’s the largest city in the world.
statue temple 2 Every year, there’s a big carnival here.
3 Lots of films are made here.
Listen and check. 4 The city has a lot of bridges.
84
5 The Olympic Games were in this city in 2016.
6 It has a statue that’s known around the world.
7 It’s the second-biggest city in China.
8 Its most famous cathedral is on an island.
64 UNIT 11
GRAMMAR Determiners
5 Read the examples below and underline all the
examples of all, both, other and another. Choose
the correct word to complete the rules.
1 Read the sentences in Exercise 6 on page 64 again
and underline all the examples of a/an and the. All the questions are about cities.
Choose the correct word to complete the rules. Are you all ready?
The city has both beaches and museums.
Central Park and Times Square are both popular.
We use the / a/an to introduce something for the There are many other great places to visit.
first time. The other famous thing here is the statue of Jesus.
We use the / a/an to talk about something already There’s another beautiful church in the city.
mentioned; with superlatives; if there is only one
in the world; in front of first, second, etc. We use all / both to talk about two things.
We use all / both to talk about a total number
2 Complete the email with the or a/an. of things.
Another / Other means ‘one more’.
Reply Forward
To: Camilla
From: Rosa GRAMMAR REFERENCE AND PRACTICE PAGE 141
I’m having (1) great holiday in Rome
with my family! Today we visited (2)
6 Complete the text about Australian cities with all,
both, other and another. Use each word twice.
Australian ies
Colosseum, and we went to (3)
fantastic museum called MAXXI. Afterwards, my
brother and I each had (4)
in (5)
(6)
ice cream
city centre. We both said it was
best ice cream in (7) world!
cit
Tomorrow, we’re going to see (8)
Trevi Fountain and also (9) palace
Australian cities have a lot to offer visitors to the
– but I can’t remember which one. Rome is
country. (1) visitors to Australia should go to
(10) really wonderful city!
Sydney. It’s the largest and oldest city in the country,
and (2) the Opera House and Harbour Bridge
are important world-famous monuments. (3)
popular cities are Perth, Brisbane and Cairns.
PRONUNCIATION the Cairns is in Queensland, in the northeast of Australia.
From this city, you can enjoy (4) the rainforest
86 3 Listen and repeat. When do we say /ði:/
and when do we say /ðə/?
and the ocean, including the Great Barrier Reef.
(5) thing you can do in Cairns is learn
(6) about the culture of the Aboriginal people
/ðiː/ the /ðə/ the of Australia.
the oldest the youngest Melbourne is (7) great Australian city. It has
excellent museums and also a modern arts centre.
the east the north
Phillip Island is not far from Melbourne, and you can
the Atlantic Ocean the Pacific Ocean see koalas, penguins, kangaroos and many
the Olympic the World Cup (8) animals here.
Games
4 Put the words into the correct column 7 Correct the mistakes in the sentences.
in the table. 1 It’s a biggest museum in my town.
the apple the Arctic 2 It’s not boring like others computer games.
the dog the Earth 3 The T-shirts cost both £15.
the Indian Ocean the North Sea 4 This phone has very good screen and camera.
the orange the River Nile 5 I went to park and I played football with my friends.
the Statue of Liberty the umbrella 6 We went on holiday to the Edinburgh.
Listen and check. Then repeat. 8 In pairs, write a city quiz.

87
• Choose three cities.
• Write some notes about each one.
• Describe the cities to another pair of students.
• Can they guess your cities? Can you guess theirs?
City living 65
READING
2 For questions 1–6, choose the correct answer.
1 Look at the signs, notices and messages. For 1–4,
where would you see them? For 5 and 6, where is
In pairs, compare your answers and say why
you chose the answer you did.
the writer? Match each sign to a place in the box.
1 A
Children cannot come here without
an adult.
at school in a shop by a river B It’s not possible to see the animals all year.
at a train station in a café on a website C Summer prices are lower than winter ones.
2 A
There’s one trip in the morning and
1 another in the afternoon.
B Go online to get more information about
Wildlife Safari Park 88
the boat trips.
Open March to October C One of the boat trips is longer than
Under 16s £12.50 Adults the other.
£25.00 3 A
Some of these jeans aren’t available in
all sizes.
Click here to book!
B The assistant can tell you which size
looks best.
C Staff here can help you find the right size.
2
Boat Trips Trips take
3 hours
4 A You can leave your suitcases here.
B You must arrive early to leave your bag.
10 am and 2 pm C If you have two bags, you get a discount
on the smaller one.
5 What must Tilly do now?
i Full details available from Tourist Information Office A Go to the cinema as quickly as possible.
B Let her friends know what to do next.
C Stay where she is until her friends arrive.
3 6 Why did Lily write this message?
Jeans for All A to give Jack some bad news about the
concert on Saturday
B to tell Jack to get a ticket for the concert
Need a bigger or smaller pair?
C to invite Jack to a concert
Ask the assistant
4
Left Luggage
We open early and close late
TALKING POINTS
Large bag – £6.00 Small bag – £3.00 09 Watch the video and ask and answer
the questions.
What’s your favourite city?
5 Why do you like it there?
Tilly – we’re all waiting for you at
the Silver Fish
Café. The film starts soon! Shall
we wait here for Is there anything you don’t like about it?
you or meet you at the cinema? What places in your city do you go to regularly
and why?
6
Reply Forward
To: Jack
From: Lily
Can’t call as class is starting, but are you free

Saturday night? We’ve got tickets for a rock
concert and Dad says I can bring a friend!
66 UNIT 11
VOCABULARY Uncountable nouns LISTENING
1 Complete the table. Match the
uncountable nouns in the box to the
1 Read the six conversations. Which conversations do
pictures A and B show?
EP countable nouns in the table.
A B
electricity food furniture
homework information
jewellery luggage money
news staff traffic wildlife
Countable Uncountable 1 A: Hi. Can I help you?

1 desk furniture B: (1) go bowling this afternoon.
2 project A: Ah, (2) we’re closing in ten minutes. Come
3 article back tomorrow morning.
4 car B: Oh, OK. Thanks.
5 coin 2 A: Excuse me. (3) open the door for me?
6 meal B: (4) . There you are.
7 battery A: Thanks!
8 details 3 A: (5) leave my guitar here while I go round the
9 animals museum?
10 shop assistant B: (6) . You need to put it in the cloakroom. It’s
11 suitcase over there, next to the shop.
12 necklace A: Thank you.
4 A: Excuse me. (7) open the window? It’s really
2 Complete the sentences with the
countable or uncountable form of the
hot in here.
B: (8) . I’m hot too!
words in the table in Exercise 1. 5 A: Excuse me. (9) the way to the skatepark?
1 I haven’t got much in my room B: (10) . Walk along this road for about
– just a bed and a chair. 100 metres, then turn left. You’ll see the park on
2 I’ve got two science to finish your right.
this weekend! A: Great! Thanks very much.
3 There’s an interesting about 6 A: Excuse me. (11) have a can of lemonade,
Rihanna in this magazine. please?
4 There’s too much on the streets B: (12) . That’s £1.50, please.
in my town.
5 Have you got a 50p ? I need it for 2 Complete the conversations with the phrases from the box.
the drinks machine.
6 Mum prepared a lot of for our Can you tell me Could I
picnic. Could you Do you mind if I
7 Dad says my new radio doesn’t use much I’d like to I’m afraid not
. I’m sorry, but Is it OK if I
8 You can find all the you need No problem Of course
about the competition on the website. Sure That’s fine
9 The number of in Africa is going
down. Listen and check. In pairs, practise the conversations.
89
10 I couldn’t find a member of
to help me.
11 I took a really small when I went
on holiday. SPEAKING
12 My sister gave me a lovely piece of
for my birthday.
1 In pairs, write three new conversations. For each
conversation choose:
• a different place – shop / café / park / tourist information
office, etc.
• a different request – something to eat / drink / a ticket /
help / advice / directions, etc.
2 Role-play your conversations for the class for them to

guess where you are.
City living 67
12 FILMS
A B C D E
ABOUT YOU
How often do you go to the cinema? F G H I
What’s your favourite film? Who is in it? What is it
about? Why do you like it?
ES
VOCABULARY AND READING WHAT MAK
A MOVIE
91
A HIT?
Types of film
1 Match the types of film in the box to the pictures A–I.
EP
action film adventure film animated film We all know a good film when we see it. It has
comedy drama horror film
musical a great story, excellent photography and
science-fiction film thriller wonderful acting. But what makes a good
movie into a big hit? This is a question that
filmmakers are always asking themselves!
Listen and check. Of course, there is no perfect answer.
90
However, movie companies have a
2 In groups, answer the questions. few tricks which help make their films
become as successful as possible.
1 Name an example of each type of movie in Exercise 1.
2 Which is your favourite type of film?
1
3 What’s the worst film you’ve ever seen? Why didn’t
you like it? Some stars have fans who will go and see any movie
they are in. Unfortunately, not all movies that have big
3 Read the blog about the ‘tricks’ movie companies use
to make their films into hits. Match the ‘tricks’ a−e to
stars in them are successful, and using famous actors
can be expensive!
paragraphs 1−5.
a Make a movie that might win a prize.
2
b Make a film that has a story or characters that the There are lots of movies which come from books, comics,
audience knows and likes. computer games or TV shows. Just think of Harry Potter,
c Advertise the movie well. Wonder Woman, X-Men, Star Wars, etc. People already
d Use actors who are really famous. love these, so they can’t wait to see the film.
e Make a film which people will write or talk about.
3
4 Read the blog again. Are the sentences right (✓) or
wrong (✗)? People often check to see what newspapers or
websites are saying about a film before they go and
1 Great acting is the most important aspect of a good film. see it. Also, people who love a movie will tell their
2 It costs film companies a lot of money to use famous friends how good it is.
actors.
3 People only use reviews in papers to decide which film
to watch. 4
4 The job of a famous actor includes telling the public This is really important. As well as posters and trailers,
how good the film is. most big films will now have a website that gives extra
5 Awards can make more people go to see a movie. information about the film. Also, when a new film comes
out, the stars of the movie usually travel around the world
5 In pairs, look at the points in Exercise 3 again and
discuss what is most important to you when choosing
and give interviews to get people interested in the film.
a film to see. 5
Awards like the Oscars and the Golden Globes
let people know which films are good to watch.
A movie that gets an award often becomes much
more popular than before.
68 UNIT 12
Relative pronouns who,
GRAMMAR which, that 4 Match the two halves of the sentences and join
them with who or which.
1 Find and underline the examples of who, which

and that in the blog post.
1
2
IMAX cinemas are popular with people
The cinemas have special seats
3 It’s not possible for children
Choose two words to complete each sentence. 4 You need to wear special glasses
1 We use who / that / which when we talk about 5 Some IMAX cinemas have screens
people. 6 There’s a 3-D film called Bugs!
2 We use who / that / which when we talk about a let you see in 3D.
things. b shows you the world of rainforest
insects.
GRAMMAR REFERENCE AND PRACTICE PAGE 142 c move, and sometimes you feel wind
or water during the film.
d are under 13 to go in alone.
2 Choose the correct answer for each sentence.
Write A (who/that) or B (which/that).
e are as tall as four double-decker buses –
about 16 metres.
1 I like films make me laugh. f like 3-D films.
2 I have a friend watches two movies a
day during the holidays. 5 Correct the mistakes in the sentences.
3 There’s a cinema near my home is over 1 My favourite colour is blue, so I bought a mobile
100 years old. phone who was blue.
4 I know a person knows Jaden Smith. 2 There are two windows don’t close very well.
5 I can’t remember the name of the film 3 He told me about something interesting
was on TV last night. happened in the film.
6 There are quite a lot of actors can speak 4 I want to sell a TV who is two years old.
two or more languages. 5 It’s a music concert it’s going to be in São Paulo.
6 There are some great books can help you learn
3 Choose the correct words to complete the text. English.
PRONUNCIATION
Cinemas of the
Spelling and syllables
future? 6 Listen and repeat the words. How many

92
letters does each word have? How many
syllables?
In the past, people (1) who / which wanted to see action adventure because
a film had to go to the cinema. That’s not true any children chocolate cinema
more, and these days many cinemas can’t find dictionary different horror
enough customers (2) which / that are happy to pay interesting medicine
photography sometimes where
their high ticket prices. That’s why some cinemas are
which
while who
starting to try different ideas. There are cinemas
(3) which / who have giant beds instead of seats, action – 6 letters, 2 syllables
and one in Malaysia (4) who / that has bean bags.
Others have sofas, dining tables or even hot tubs!
Some cinemas even show ‘4D’ films. These are 3D
films with special effects (5) who / that happen in the
cinema at the same time as in the film. These can be
rain, wind, smoke and smells. The seats also move
around, so you really feel like you are in the movie!
Films 69
Showing today at
STAR CINEMA
Th A The Drake Adventures
AdveeDrake Tom Drake is on holiday with his family, visiting various European cities. He doesn’t enjoy
nture
s sightseeing or museums, so he is really bored and can’t wait to go home. But things change 93
when the family visits a castle, where Tom sees two men steal a painting. He is in big trouble
when the men come after him. Things get really exciting when Tom finds out who the men
are and what their real reason for stealing the painting is.
Body
B Body Swap
Swap
Hannah and her brother Chris were good friends when they were little, but now they hate each
other. Everyone thinks Hannah is really cool, but no one wants to be Chris’s friend, and she says
she won’t help him. Then, one morning, they wake up in each other’s bodies. They have to learn to
understand each other better, or they’ll stay this way forever. This film will make you laugh till you cry!
C Game, Set and Match

Carly James is a brilliant young tennis player, but has lots of problems in her life.
She’s not close to her parents because they’re often away on business, and she doesn’t
find schoolwork easy. But while she’s preparing for a big competition, she starts
working with a new coach. It seems he is the one person who really understands her.
He knows that she can be a big star if she listens to him and works hard. Finally, things
start to improve for Carly, but can she do well in the competition?
READING GAME
1 Read about the films on the cinema web page. What type
SET
MATCH
of film do you think each one is?
2 For each question, choose the correct answer. VOCABULARY Conjunctions

Write A for The Drake Adventures, B for Body Swap
or C for Game, Set, Match.
Conjunctions are words that join parts of
1 Which film is about someone who is in danger? sentences together.
2 Which film is about someone who gets the help she
I enjoy films. I don’t like going to the
needs?
cinema.
3 Which film is about someone who isn’t very popular?
I enjoy films, but I don’t like going to the
4 Which film is about someone who might win a prize?
cinema.
5 Which film is about someone who learns why something
I want to go shopping. I haven’t got any
happened?
clothes.
6 Which film is about someone who is happier after
I want to go shopping because I haven’t got
meeting someone new?
any clothes.
7 Which film is about someone who doesn’t like a
I’m having a party on my birthday.
family member?
I’m visiting my family on my birthday.
I’m having a party and I’m visiting my family
on my birthday.
EP These words can also be conjunctions:
TALKING POINTS if

or so that
Which of these films would you like to see? Why? when where while
Do you prefer watching films at home or at the cinema? Why?
70 UNIT 12
1 Find and underline all the conjunctions on the WRITING
cinema web page. Study the sentences carefully,
then match the two halves of the sentences below.
1 My friends and I go to the cinema if PREPARE TO WRITE
2 My friend says that An invitation to the cinema
3 I like eating popcorn while GET READY Read the invitation to the cinema
4 We usually sit at the back, where in the email and answer the questions.
5 I don’t like it when
1 Who is Jake inviting?
6 I could have a party for my birthday or
2 What film does he want to see?
7 The film was very scary, so
3 When does he want to go?
a we get the best view of the screen.
Look at the prepositions. Which preposition
b we have enough money and there is a good
do we use with:
film on.
c the Harry Potter books are better than the films. a times? b days? c streets?
d people talk during the film. d places where you do something?
e I’m watching a film in the cinema. e if you are moving to a place?
f I didn’t stay till the end.
g we could go to the cinema.
To: Leo Reply Forward
2 Complete the sentences so that they are true for

you. Then, in groups, compare your answers.
From: Jake
Hi Leo,
I often listen to music while I’m
I’d like to live in a place where Would you like to come to the
In the future, I am sure that cinema with me and a few friends
I’m happiest when on Saturday? We want to see
I only get angry if Ghostbusters. It’s about a group
This weekend, I’ll or of women who try to find ghosts in
New York. It sounds really good! It’s
on at Galaxy Cinema and it starts at
6.45 pm. We’re meeting at the bus
LISTENING stop on Friar Road at 6 pm. Let me

know if you can come!
Jake
You will hear Finley inviting a friend to the PLAN Plan your own invitation to the cinema.
94 cinema. Make notes.
1 What day will they go to the cinema? • What day are you going?
A Friday • Which film are you going to see?
B Saturday • What’s it about?
C Sunday • What time does it start?
2 What does Ana say about Body Swap? • Which cinema are you going to?
A It’s a bit too short. • How are you getting there?
B It’s got famous actors in it. WRITE Write your invitation. Begin with Hi/
C It’s popular with her friends. Dear and your friend’s name. End with your
3 What time does the film begin? name. Use some
A 6.10 B 6.30 C 6.45 relative pronouns,
4 How much are the tickets? conjunctions and
A £5.00 B £7.50 C £10.00 prepositions in your
5 How will they get home? invitation. Write
A They’ll get a lift. 50–80 words.
B They’ll walk. IMPROVE In pairs, read
C They’ll get the bus. each other’s invitations.
2 In pairs, compare your answers. Then listen
again to check your answers.
Check for mistakes with
relative pronouns,
prepositions and
94
conjunctions.
Films 71
LIFE SKILLS
CREATIVITY
AND INNOVATION
BRAINSTORMING
1 When do you need ideas from other people?
Tick the sentences that are true for you.
LIFE SKILLS
Brainstorming is a way to think of
to do projects at school different ideas:
to decide what to wear in the morning • to solve a problem
to make a room more attractive for a party • to create something
to do homework • to plan something
to buy a present for a friend
Brainstorming is thinking of lots of ideas
In pairs, compare your answers. in a group or individually. If more people
2 Think of an example where you worked with other
people to get ideas and tell the class.
take part, then there are more ideas.
Last term, we had a science project. We had

to think of an experiment to do in groups.
3 Read the text and match groups A–D to the

brainstorm techniques 1–4.
How and what can we brainstorm?

1 Mind map 2 Lists
restaurants
location School trip to the mountains
Food Drink Clothes Equipment
buildings The best city sandwiches water warm backpack
biscuits juice sweater whistle
boots
monuments shops
3 Cards 4 Image circles

Name for our school pet
palm TV
trees
Max Archie Leo Fluffly
shells
Tilly Jack Tucker console
hamburgers
72 LIFE SKILLS
4 Read the texts again and answer the questions.
96 7 Listen again and answer the questions.
GROUP A 1 What are the topics they mention first?

1 Did all the students write down their ideas? 2 List two of the themes the students suggest.
2 How did they organise their ideas? 3 Which nationalities do they mention?
4 How many topics do they have at the end?
GROUP B 5 What is the name of the final topic they mention?
3 What did the students write in the circles?
4 Did all the students write in the circles? 8 Choose the correct options.
GROUP C
5 What did the students write in the middle circle? USEFUL LANGUAGE
6 Did they learn new information? 1 Do we / Shall we all write down a list of
suggestions first / firstly?
GROUP D 2 Why don’t we / We think to make a mind map?
7 What did the students use to show their ideas? 3 Then / Last, what about the other circles?
8 What did they do with ideas that were the same? 4 What about / Let’s start with the theme.
5 Shall we / How about different nationalities?
5 In pairs, discuss which brainstorming idea you
think is best and explain why.
6 Next / After, we’ll have to choose decorations.
96 6 Listen to four students planning a school party.

Which brainstorming method do they use?
96
Listen again and check.
Group A
PROJECT
We chose one person in our group to be the
95
secretary, who wrote down the ideas. We put the
An advertisement
ideas in lists in different columns. When we had lots
of ideas, we numbered them in order of importance.
Then, we crossed out the ideas we didn’t like so
much. In the end, we planned a fantastic event! You see this advertisement for a competition
and decide to take part.
Group B
In my group, we drew lots and lots of circles on the YOUNG FILMMAKERS
page. Then, we took turns to put an idea in each
COMPETITION
bubble or circle. We didn’t write sentences. Instead,
we wrote one or two words which expressed our
idea, although some people drew a picture. Some
Have you got an idea for a new film?
of the ideas were crazy, but it was fun to see things
Make a poster with the title, names of
that other people thought were important.
the actors and a scene from the film.
Write a short description of the scene
Group C you choose.
The winners will spend a day at the film
We decided to draw a circle in the middle of the school, learning to use cameras and
page and write the topic in the centre. Then, we create special effects.
drew lines which connected the middle circle
to the other circles. Each of the circles contained
ideas about a different part of the topic. It was • Work in small groups.
good because everyone knew different pieces of • Read the situation.
information, like names or places, so when we • Decide which brainstorming technique you
finished, we had a lot to write about. are going to use.
• Brainstorm ideas.
Group D • Choose the best ideas and make a poster
for the competition.
Each person in the class wrote one idea on a card. • Present your poster and explain your film
Then, we put all the cards on the board at the back idea to another group or to the class.
of the room. We put the cards that had the same
ideas together in groups on the board and then we
voted to decide on the best one. Brainstorming 73
VOCABULARY GRAMMAR
1 Match the words 1−8 to a−h to make compound

nouns. Use each word once only.
1 Choose the correct words to complete the
sentences.
1 shopping a class 1 My dad hadn’t / didn’t have to work yesterday.
2 card b film 2 I’m happy with your idea about go / going
3 old c game shopping.
4 fitness d board 3 I think that I lost it on the / a sofa in the living
5 art e assistant room.
6 action f area 4 I bought three shirts who / which cost £10, £17
7 message g gallery and £25.
8 shop h town
Correct the mistakes in these sentences.
2 Find the odd word out in each set. Say why it
does not fit.
5 Oh, and we must forget to take our video and
camera.
0 blog link prize site 6 I will try call to you on Wednesday.
‘Prize’ is the odd one out. The others are all 7 Where can I find an information about the bus
about the internet. times?
1 traffic stadium cricket fan 8 My favourite meal is pizza. I love it, especially
2 horror skier musical adventure the pizza who my mum cooks!
3 embassy mosque temple cathedral
4 guest member statue relative 2 Put the words in the correct order to make
sentences.
5 climber diver runner golfer
6 board game puzzle video game 1 lots / I / to / listening / of / kinds / of / enjoy /
badminton music / different / .
7 skyscraper tournament champion 2 for / contact / Could / to / school / you / try /
professional the / me / ?
3 anyone / speak / exam / mustn’t / to / before /
3 Write the missing letters to complete the word in
each sentence.
Students / the / .
4 I / this / is / than / interesting / think / film /
1 Ben loves all kinds of sport. He’s starting the / one / more / other / .
k lessons on Saturday. 5 helping / the / I / with / mind / activities / don’t /
2 I was really sad when my mum was in hospital. tomorrow / you / sports/ .
Im her a lot. 6 worried / was / about / another / Frank / dance /
3 Do you have a c at the school? joining / class / .
Then I can phone and ask for that person. 7 caught / bus / outside / hospital / that / Elsa /
4 I don’t want to play cards. Let’s do a stops / the / the / .
p instead.
5 My favourite type of film is a 3 Complete the sentences with the correct form of
the verbs in brackets.
c because they always make me
laugh. 1 I might stop (have) piano lessons next
6 It didn’t take a long time to u all year.
the photos to my blog. 2 My best friend hopes (take part) in the
7 I found a great new website for teens. You don’t cricket match on Saturday.
have to pay. It’s free to j . 3 We decided (visit) the art gallery first.
8 I got my mum a necklace for her birthday as 4 I forgot (do) my maths homework last
I know she loves j . night.
5 My mum really misses (see) my brother
now that he’s at university in the USA.
6 You need (write) your names on this
list before we start.
7 I didn’t enjoy (watch) that horror film
last night.
74 Review 3
READING
1 A
Ben wants Jim to go to the cinema without
1 him.
B Ben will catch the next bus.
C Ben is meeting his mum at the cinema.
2 A
There is something missing from the
Jim
skateboard.
I missed the bus! Don’t wait for me. B The skateboard is several years old.
My mum can give me a lift later, so C The skateboard is too small for Diana.
I’ll meet you after the film.
3 A
Penny asks John to send a text to
Ben Aunt Sandra.
B Penny wants to call Aunt Sandra.
C Penny needs to get Aunt Sandra’s address.
Skateboard for sarlyle

2
4 A
All pizzas are free in the evening.
B Two pizzas cost the same as one.
new Nea C The cheapest pizzas cost £6.
Needs wheels
£20 Small size 5 A
Andy tells Clare that he found her umbrella
in the bookshop.
Diana 09863567 B Andy will contact the bookshop to tell them
Clare will collect his umbrella.
3 C Andy dropped his umbrella and wants Clare
to find it for him.
6 A There are classes twice a week.
B All classes are full price at the moment.
John C The classes are for adults only.
I forgot Aunt Sandra’s address! My
battery’s low, so please phone her
to say I’m coming, and text me Aunt LISTENING
Sandra’s address. Thanks!
Penny.
2 For these questions, choose the correct answer.
Pizzas
You will hear Serena talking to her friend Ed about
4 97 the new sports centre.
1 What does Serena like best about the new sports
centre?
Starting at £6 A she can take fitness classes.
Buy two, get one free B she can play racket sports.
6 pm–9 pm only C she can go climbing.
2 The sports centre closes
5 A at the same time every day.
B later on Saturdays and Sundays.
Clare
C earlier in the holidays.
I left my umbrella in the bookshop. Can 3 Serena thinks Ed will like climbing because
you pick it up for me? I’ll let them know A he already knows the teacher.
you’re coming. B he doesn’t like team sports.
C he’s got a strong body.
Andy. 4 Ed likes board games because
A they make him think.
Daanncece
6
D Mondays and Fridays
B he doesn’t have to move around.
C he can’t play them at school.
All levels and ages 5 Ed can contact the games club
Classes Discounts available A by text.
B by letter.
0131–6006655 C by email.
UNITS 9–12 75
13 LIFE EXPERIENCES
The Great A B C
Outdoors:
98
10 things to do D E F G
before you’re 16
aked down a J
Have you ever climbed a tree or kay H I
’s the time to do it!
river? No, you haven’t? Well, now
nload the app and tick the

Start with these ten activities. Dow
can do them in any order
activities off as you do them. You
finished these ten, click on
and at any time. When you have
or Sport, and download ten
another section, Animals, People
your friends.
more. Compare your activities with
❯ Off you go! No time to lose.

ABOUT YOU
List as many outdoors activities that you can
think of.
VOCABULARY AND READING Which ones do you like doing?

Which ones don’t you like doing?
Outdoor activities
1 Match the phrases in the box to the pictures on the website A–J.
EP
camp under the stars climb a tree explore a cave
kayak down a river look for fossils pick wild fruit
play in the snow record birdsong track wild animals
try rock climbing
99
Listen, check and repeat.
100 2 Listen to Juan talking to his friend Susanna about the activities
on the website. Which activities would Juan like to do?
100 3 Listen again and complete the table about Susanna. Which activities are new for Susanna and which are not new?
Activity
New
Not new
When?
Where?
4 Look at the table. In pairs, ask and answer the questions.

1 Which of the outdoor activities on the website do you like doing or would you like to do? Why?
2 Which ones don’t you like doing or wouldn’t you like to do? Why?
76 UNIT 13
GRAMMAR Present perfect with ever and never
1 Read the statements and questions. Then, choose the correct words to complete the rules.
Statements Questions Short answers

I’ve picked wild fruit. Have you ever kayaked down a river? Yes, I have.
I’ve never tracked wild animals. Have you ever climbed a tree? No, I haven’t.
1 We use have or has and the present / past PRONUNCIATION Past participles
participle of the main verb to form the present
perfect.
2 We use the present perfect to talk about 101 4 Listen to the past participles and decide
in which words we say -ed as an extra
experiences in the past / present / future. syllable.
3 We can / can’t use words like last week or ago
with the present perfect. Write these verbs as past participles in
4 We use never / ever in present perfect the correct column.
questions about people’s experiences.
5 We use never / ever in present perfect climb collect end explore
statements about people’s experiences. finish hate jump paint
play tidy try want
camped recorded
2 Make sentences and questions in the present
perfect.
1 My mum / visit / a safari park.
2 I / never camp / in the winter.
3 you / ever pick / fruit from a tree?
4 Kris / ever climb / a mountain? Listen and check. Then repeat.
102
5 We / never return / to the amazing campsite
in the woods.
6 My little sisters / play / in snow.
3 Correct the mistakes in the sentences. 5 Make questions about the activities on the
website on page 76 using the present perfect.
1 I never try sleeping under the stars before. Then, in pairs, ask and answer them.
2 These are the best apples I ever picked.
3 My mother has never play the piano. Have you ever played in the snow?
4 And it is in a forest. The best place I never visited.
5 No, I’ve ever failed an exam.
Yes, I have.
Have you ever explored a cave?
No, I haven’t.
Life experiences 77
READING
1 Read the introduction to the quiz. For each question, write the correct answer.
Write ONE word for each gap.
Reply Forward
To: Nina
From: Marco
Hi Nina
Have (0) a look at this quiz. I found it (1) the internet and thought you’d like to see it. It’s
about people’s different life experiences, both good (2) bad. Don’t worry! I did the quiz and there
are quite a (3) things I haven’t done. Some things are more fun (4) others – for example
who wants to ride a horse? However, I read that it’s important to have different kinds of life experiences
because they help us learn (5) the world. Let (6) know what you think.
Marco.
B C
A
2 Match the questions in the Life Quiz to photos A–L.
3 Answer the questions in the Life Quiz. In pairs,

compare your answers. Are your answers the
same or different?
D E F
103
uiz
Life
G H I
1 Have you ever swum with sharks?
2 Have you ever broken anything valuable?

K L
3 Have you ever met a famous person? J
4 Have you ever had a bad dream?
5 Have you ever eaten Korean food?
6 Have you ever been in a film?
7 Have you ever made fresh pasta? TALKING POINTS

10 Watch the video and ask and answer
8 Have you ever slept in a tent?
the questions.
9 Have you ever grown vegetables to eat? What’s the most amazing thing you’ve ever done?
What’s the most interesting place you’ve ever
10 Have you ever ridden a horse? visited?
11 Have you ever flown in a plane? What’s the most unusual thing you’ve ever done?
Have you swum with dolphins?
12 Have you ever sent a message in a bottle? Have you ridden a camel?
Have you eaten a frog?
78 UNIT 13
VOCABULARY Past participles SPEAKING
1 What is the past simple form of each verb in the box? 1 Now, you’re going to write your own
Life Quiz.
EP Now, match each verb to a past participle in the quiz.
a In pairs, think of other life experiences
be break eat fly grow have you think are important. They can be
make meet ride send sleep swim good or bad.
b In pairs, write six questions beginning
Have you ever …
2 In pairs, take turns to name a photo from the Life Quiz and
make a true statement about it.
c In small groups, read each other’s
questions and choose eight questions
you think are the best.
Picture I
I’ve ridden a horse. Picture A d Individually, write the eight questions for
the Life Quiz on a piece of paper. Make
I’ve never slept in a tent. I like sleeping inside. sure there is room to write answers for at
least two students.
e Ask your questions to at least two other
3 In groups, ask and answer questions about the most
exciting thing each of you has done. Tell the class.
students in the class. Don’t ask students
from your group.
f In your original group, discuss the
answers students gave you to the eight
LISTENING questions.
g Report back to the class about the
results of the Life Quiz. Use the phrases
104 1 Listen to the radio show. Jim is talking to Christina Wells,

an explorer. Which three parts of the world does she talk
in the box to help you.
about? We asked … students.

Some of the students we asked have …
104 2 Listen again. Complete the questions about each trip.
Then in pairs, answer the questions.
Most of the students we asked have …
Most of the students we asked
Trip 1 haven’t …
1 Complete Jim’s question to Christina: Have you ever None of the students we asked have …
? All of the students we asked have …
2 What was she doing in the rainforest?
3 What information did she not want to share with people?
Trip 2
4 Complete Jim’s question to Christina: Have you ever
?
5 How was she travelling to the North Pole?
6 What did she do to help her think more clearly?
Trip 3
7 What is different for Christina about this trip?
8 How will she travel?
9 How long will it take?
Life experiences 79
14 SPENDING MONEY
A B C D
E F G H
ABOUT YOU
Do you like shopping? Why? / Why not?
What shops do you go to the most?
I J K L

Shops
1
EP
Match the shop words in the box to the
photos A–L. YORK TIMES 106
bakery bookshop butcher’s 21st March

café chemist’s clothes shop
department store market
newsagent’s shoe shop Reading Time
sweet shop supermarket 16 Old Road
Are you a reader? Then this is the place for you. Doors open
Listen and check. Then repeat. Choose something from the shelves. Then relax, 6th March
105
have a coffee and read.
2 Where can you buy these things? Choose
from the shops in Exercise 1. Sometimes,
Comfortable sofas and free wi-fi.
there is more than one possibility.

Something Special
apples bread burgers 52 Main Street
chocolates dictionary Do you like sweets and chocolates?
magazines sandwich socks Come and choose from the hundreds we
sun cream tea towels trainers have in our shop.
You can even try before you buy!
Opening 20th March.
3 In pairs, think of at least two more things
you can buy in each shop.
One Foot After Another
4 Read the advertisements in a magazine.
What kind of shops are they?
13 River Avenue
We’ve got everything you need for your feet.
5 Where can you … There’s something for everyone in our store.
Walking boots on sale.
1 surf the internet?
Our first day is 3rd April.
2 buy something to wash your hands with?
3 buy something for a lower price
than usual? Shop and Try
4 have some free food?
www.shopandtry.net
5 pick up something you bought online? Open from
All the latest fashions in clothes.
24th March
6 Read the advertisements again and answer
the questions.
Order online, collect from our shop in York.
Try your jeans, jumpers and dresses on in store.
Make sure they’re right for you!
1 What is the date of the magazine?
2 When does each shop open?
Brown’s Chemist’s
30 Grove Street Opening
As well as medicines, get soap and make-up here. 19th
Everything you need for baby too. March
Free coffee.
80 UNIT 14
Present perfect with just,
GRAMMAR yet, already 4 Write a list of six things you’ve just done. In pairs,
compare your lists.
1 The date of the magazine is 21st March.

Which shops are open and which shops will be
I’ve just opened my book.
open soon? 5 Correct the mistakes in the sentences.

1 You already borrow my book for a week.
Reading Time (6th March). It has already opened.
2 I’ve just bought a new smartphone, but I didn’t
Something Special (20th March). It has just opened.
put music on it yet.
One Foot After Another (3rd April). It hasn’t
3 I just see a football match with my father.
opened yet.
4 I already have bought something to eat.
Has One Foot After Another opened yet? No,
5 Are you still looking for your keys? If you don’t
it hasn’t.
find them yet, I think they are in your bag.
Choose the correct sentence, a or b, for these two
shops. Today is 21st March.
PRONUNCIATION
Shop and Try opens on 24th March.
Intonation: questions and statements
Brown’s Chemist’s opened on 19th March.
a It hasn’t opened yet. 107 6 Listen and repeat.
b It has just opened. Has your brother arrived yet?
Yes, he’s just arrived.
2 Study the examples in Exercise 1. Then match 1–4
with a–d to make sentences about the present Has your sister arrived yet?
perfect. Yes, she’s already arrived.
1 To talk about something which happened a

very short time ago,
2 To talk about something which we expect to 7 Make a list of ten things you do every day. In pairs,
ask and answer questions about today.
happen in the future,
3 To talk about something which happened not
long ago, or sooner than someone expected, Have you done your homework yet?
4 To ask about something which we expect to
happen in the future, Yes, I’ve already done my homework.
a we use the present perfect negative with yet.
b we use present perfect questions with yet.
Have you used the computer yet?
c we use the present perfect with already.
d we use the present perfect with just.
Yes, I’ve just used the computer.
3 Look at the things in the picture that Carla has

just bought for a camping trip. Then, look at her
4G
shopping list. Answer the questions using yet
and already.
1 Which things has she already bought?
Shopping List:
2 Which things hasn’t she bought yet? water bottle
pillow
hat
blanket
gloves
socks
T-shirt
biscuits
scarf
boots
fruit
toothbrush
Spending money 81
POCKET MONEY
Did you know? 108 4 You might be surprised at the
answer. Teenagers in the UK spend more
1 Most teenagers receive pocket money every of their money on food than on clothes.
$
week. But not everyone gets the same amount of Is that true for you too? Teens do more
money. Have you asked your friends how much shopping online than before and online
they get? You might be surprised. And if you’re a girl clothes shopping is cheaper. So perhaps
you’ll be amazed to learn that boys often get more this is one reason they don’t
than girls of the same age! spend so much on clothes.
2 Teenagers up to the age of about 15 in the 5 Some parents do!
UK have about £5 a week in pocket money. But in They only let them buy some
Italy, France and Spain, the same age group gets things. Other parents want
£
about €9, which is a bit more. In the US, pocket their teens to save all their
money is called ‘an allowance’. Most teenagers get pocket money and spend
an allowance of about $30, which is more than it on something big in the
£20 or €25. future, or not spend it at all.
3 Quite a lot of teenagers do. They have to do
things in the house, like washing-up and cleaning TALKING POINTS
and then they get their pocket money. If they What was the most surprising thing for you in the article?
€
don’t do the jobs, they don’t get the money. Some
teenagers have part-time jobs too, which means
they have more than their pocket money to spend
Units of measurement
each week.
VOCABULARY and money
READING 1 Complete the sentences using words from the box.
EP
centimetres dollars and cents euros and cents
grams kilograms kilometres litres
1 What is pocket money? metres millilitres pounds and pence
2 Do you get pocket money?
3 How much do you get a week? 1 You buy food in or .
4 Do you spend more of your pocket money 2 You buy drink in or .
on food or clothes? 3 You use , and to buy things.
4 You find out how far away something is in ,
2 Read the article quickly. Match the question
to the correct paragraph.
and .
a So what happens in different countries? 2 Work with a partner and decide how you say the
amounts.
b Do teens have to work for their pocket
money?
c Do parents tell teens what to spend pocket 260 g €15.34 700 ml 55 cm 2.5 l
money on? 37 p £19.99 6 kg 62 c $27 1.65 m
d What do teenagers spend their money on?
e Do all teenagers get pocket money? Listen and check. Then repeat.
109
3 Answer the questions about the article.

3 Complete the descriptions for photos 1–4 with the
1 What’s the difference between the pocket words in the box.
EP
money girls get and the pocket money
boys get? a pair of a set of a slice of a variety of
2 Where do teenagers get more pocket money,
the USA, the UK or Italy, France and Spain?
3 What is pocket money called in the USA?
4 What do some teens have to do before they
get their pocket money?
5 How do some teenagers add to their pocket 1 pizza 3 cups
money?
6 What do some parents want their children
to do with their pocket money?
2 sunglasses 4 drinks
82 UNIT 14
4 Complete the sentences with the words from
Exercise 3.
5 In pairs, write conversations. Use the ideas below
and the conversation in Exercise 4 to help you.
Then, in pairs, practise the conversations.
1 I’ve just bought shoes. Do you like
them? 1 You’re planning a day out at the beach with your
2 Let’s have music styles at the party. friend. You forgot about the food.
We can have rock, blues and rap. 2 You’re planning a visit to a new shopping centre.
3 Can you pass me the knife? I’ll cut you You forgot how you’re going to get there.
cake.
4 Our teacher has got keys for the school.
WRITING
LISTENING
PREPARE TO WRITE
1 Work in pairs. Tell your partner what you like to
eat on your birthday.
An email
110 2 David and Lana are planning a birthday picnic for

their friend Pia. Listen and tick (✓) the things they
GET READY Read the note from David to
his dad. Correct the punctuation. Add full
have already got. stops, capital letters, apostrophes and
question marks.
Things for Pia’s Picnic dear dad
Lana and i need to get some things for

pizzas fruit juice pias party please can you take us to the
crisps water supermarket this morning thanks see you
later
apples
david
Plus In pairs, compare your corrected notes.

PLAN You have just bought a birthday
cake blanket present for your sister. Write a message
lemonade presents! about it to your English friend Sam.
In your message
• say what you have bought for your sister
• say why you chose it
• say which shop you bought it in.
110 3 Listen again. Look at the list in Exercise 2.

How much of each food and drink have they got IMPROVE In pairs, read each other’s notes
or do they want? and look for mistakes. Check that you have
4 Read the next part of Lana and David’s
conversation and answer the questions.
both included all the necessary information
and that you used punctuation correctly.
Lana: Hey, just a minute, we forgot about music.

We haven’t chosen the music yet.
We can’t have a party without music. What
shall we do?
David: I could bring my guitar, I suppose.
Lana: Yes, and I can text everyone who’s
$
coming, if you like, and ask them to bring
instruments, too. Right. Is that all?
€
David: Oh, I nearly forgot. The biscuits! I’ll try and
make them this afternoon. If not, I’ll make
them in the morning.
Lana: OK.
£
1 Which two underlined phrases make offers and
suggestions?
2 Which underlined phrase says what the situation
will be when something does not happen?
Spending money 83
CULTURE
SHOPPING
AND MONEY Amazing 111
1 In pairs, discuss the questions.

1 Where do you usually go shopping?
MARKETS
2 Do you or your parents ever shop in markets?
A
You should definitely visit the Queen
2 Match the types of markets in the box to the
photos A–D. How many objects can you name
Victoria Market in Melbourne, Australia.
The market started in the 1870s. Today,
that you can buy in them? Do you have similar it’s open every morning on Tuesdays and
markets in your country?
Thursdays to Sundays. There’s also a night
market on Wednesdays from 5 to 10 pm.
food market clothes market
antiques market flower market There are more than 600 shops and stalls
in the market. The fresh-food areas sell
fruit and vegetables, cakes, fish and meat
3 Read about three famous markets. Which
one isn’t a food market?
(including kangaroo and crocodile steaks!).
A B
C D
C
St Lawrence Market in Toronto, Canada,
started in 1803, but they built the
buildings you can see today in 1904. The
market is open Tuesday to Saturday from 8 am
to early evening. You can buy many different
things there from more than 100 stalls,
especially fresh food and delicious homemade
products. A fun thing to do is cookery classes
in the Market Kitchen. Here, you can learn to
make different dishes and take them home to
eat! The farmers’ market opens on Saturdays
at 5 am, and local farmers come to sell meat,
fruit, vegetables, eggs, etc.
84 CULTURE
4 Read the text again and answer the questions.
Which market(s) …
1 is sometimes open at 9 pm?
2 has fewer visitors if it is raining?
3 can you buy a guitar in?
4 is over 100 years old?
5 can you learn to cook in?
6 sells unusual meat?
7 is the biggest?
5 Find words in the text that match the definitions.

1 a kind of small shop (text A)
2 a piece of meat (text A)
3 rings, necklaces, etc. (text B)
4 a kind of music (text B)
5 constructed (text C)
6 food that people prepare
themselves (text C)
B 6
Hell’s Kitchen market is Listen to Alice talking to her friend Dan about a market
112
an outdoor street market in in London. Which part of the market did she like most?
New York, USA. It only opens at
weekends from 9 am to 5 pm, with nearly 112 7 Listen again. Are these statements right (✓) or wrong (✗)?
a hundred stalls on the streets – but if 1 Alice went to Camden Lock Market last Saturday.
2 Camden Lock Market is very big.
the weather is bad, there aren’t so many
3 You can buy fresh fruit and vegetables in the market.
people selling or buying. It started in
4 Alice ate pizza in the market.
1976, and you can buy antiques, such 5 Alice bought three T-shirts and a handbag.
as old furniture or clothes and jewellery. 6 Alice’s friend Lisa likes Justin Bieber.
If you enjoy music, it is a great place
to visit because there are often jazz TALKING POINTS
concerts, and you can buy musical Which market would you like to visit:
instruments there, as well. Local artists Queen Victoria, Hell’s Kitchen, St Lawrence
also show their paintings, sculptures and or Camden Lock? Explain why.
photos.
PROJECT A market
Find out about a famous market in your

country. Make a poster to present the
information to the class. Use pictures
and photos to make the poster more
interesting. Include information about:
• where it is
• when it is open
• what you can buy, see and do there.
Present your poster to the class.
11 NOW WATCH THE CULTURE VIDEO Shopping AND MONEY 85

15 FREE TIME
A
ABOUT YOU
How many hours of free time do you have per week?
Is this the right amount, too much or too little?
B

Free-time activities
1 In pairs, match photos A–E to activities in the questionnaire. Which

of the activities do you think are most popular in your class?
EP
C
Questionnaire
Activities I do I’d like to I’m not at all
this try this interested in this
chatting
collecting
D
cooking
going out with friends
going shopping
listening to music
making things
photography
playing an instrument
playing computer games
playing sport
E
reading books
singing, acting, dancing
spending time online
watching TV
2 Do the questionnaire in your class. Walk around the room and ask people which activities they do in their free
time, which they’d like to try and which they are not interested in. Write your results for each activity or hobby
like this:
3 In small groups, look at all your results and write some sentences.
In our class, lots of / some / a few people already do these activities: , , .
In our class, lots of / some / a few people want to try these activities: , , .
In our class, no one likes these activities: , , .
Were you surprised by any of your results? Why?
86 UNIT 15
113 4 Listen to three young people talking about what they do in their free time.
Write the activity or activities from the questionnaire below each speaker.
Owen Kyle Erin
113 5 Listen again. Are the sentences right (✓) or wrong (✗)?
1 Owen keeps his computer in his bedroom. 4 Kyle does two different sports.
2 Owen thinks he uses his computer too much. 5 Erin has got a new guitar.
3 Kyle still collects pins and badges. 6 Erin has her own camera.
GRAMMAR Present perfect with for and since
1 Look at these examples. Then, complete the rules below

with for or since. PRONUNCIATION Weak forms
I’ve had my own computer for three years.
I haven’t bought any football cards for a long time. 114 5 Listen to the sentences and
notice the pronunciation of the
I’ve played the guitar for two years. underlined words.
I’ve had this guitar since January.
I’ve had one of them since I was ten. I’ve had this since I was three.
My dad’s had his camera since he was a teenager. He’s played basketball for two years.
I’ve just walked home from school.
1 We use with an amount of time, such as a They haven’t been to your house
number of hours / months / years. since Saturday.
2 We use with the time when the action started, I’ve bought some nice shoes.
such as a day / date / age.
Listen again and repeat.
114
2 Complete the sentences with for or since. 6 In pairs, ask and answer.
1 Jack’s lived here he was three years old. Do you have a hobby?
2 Mum’s been asleep four hours.
3 I’ve been a member of the club last month.
Yes No
4 Sophie’s had her new phone three days.
5 We’ve had our puppy 31st October.
6 The students have worked together Monday. What is it? What do you do in your free time?
7 You’ve been at this school six months.
8 I’ve had a headache yesterday. How long have you enjoyed doing it?
9 They’ve known Jules a long time. Do you need anything special to do it?
3 Complete the sentences so they are true for you. In pairs,

compare your answers. Yes No
1 I haven’t read a comic since . What do you need?

2 I haven’t watched a cartoon for . Do you usually do it with other people?
3 I’ve played for .
4 I’ve been able to since I was .
5 I’ve lived in my home since . 7 Write sentences about your partner.
In groups, read out your sentences.
6 I’ve had this pen for .
7 I’ve known my best friend since . How much did your partner remember
about you?
Andrei has done karate since he was seven.
1 It’s been my hobby from I was ten years old. He has a special white jacket and trousers
2 I’ve needed one since a month. called a gi. He has a blue belt. He’s had it
3 I’ve had it since a year. for six months.
4 I’ve wanted to buy this T-shirt since several weeks.
5 It has been open since one month.
Free time 87
READING
1 Look at the photos and the title of the blog. What do you think geocaching is?
Read the blog once to check your ideas.
MY HOBBY – geocaching
Blog post written by Lucy Barton, aged 14
115
I started geocaching because of my uncle – he’s It’s a fantastic feeling when you find a
done it for years. Geocaching is a treasure hunt cache! You have to open the box and
that you do with an app. The ‘treasure’ is a box put your name in the little book inside.
called a cache that someone else has hidden. Often, there are things in the cache as
There are 2 million of these, all over the world! well. You can take something out to
It’s a really fun hobby and I’m so glad my uncle keep if you want to, but if you do that,
told me about it. We have a great time doing it you should always put something new
together, but if he’s busy I go with friends, or do it inside for the next person.
by myself.
Next year, I’m going to start using the
The app takes you quite close to the cache, paid version of the app. Then, I can
and then it gives you a puzzle to help you find make and hide my own caches! I’m
exactly the right place. A lot of older people also going to tell all my friends and
are geocachers, so some of the puzzles are family about geocaching. It’s such a
difficult for me as they are about movies great way for everyone, from adults
and TV shows that I haven’t seen. But to little kids, to spend time together,
I don’t really mind – I can always enjoy themselves and get to know
look them up on the internet! their local area.
2 Read the text again. For each question, choose the correct answer.
1 What do we learn about Lucy from the first paragraph?
A She has done her hobby for longer than her uncle.
B She didn’t enjoy her hobby much at the beginning.
C She doesn’t always do her hobby with other people.
2 What does Lucy say about the puzzles?
A They can be hard for her because she’s young.
B It’s a shame so many of them are about films.
C People shouldn’t look online to find the answers.
3 What must you do when you find a box?
A check how many people have already found it
B leave something of yours for the next person
C write down who you are in the little book
4 What does Lucy plan to do in the future?
A spend more time geocaching in the city
B get other people interested in geocaching
C spend less money on going geocaching
5 What do we find out about geocaching from this article? TALKING POINTS
A It’s becoming more popular every year.
What makes geocaching
B It takes a long time to learn how to do it.
a good hobby?
C It’s a good hobby for people of all ages.
Would you like to try it?
Why / Why not?
88 UNIT 15
Collocations about
VOCABULARY having fun LISTENING
1 Look at the phrases in the box. Which ones

are in the blog?
116 1 Listen to a girl talking about her hobby – beekeeping. Who
is she speaking to? How long has she done her hobby?
EP
have fun 116 2 Listen again and decide if the sentences are right (✓) or
wrong (✗).
a great time
a laugh 1 Libby got her bees as a birthday present.
2 Libby went on a beekeeping course with some other
spend time with a friend teenagers.
doing a hobby 3 Libby loved beekeeping as soon as she tried it.
be glad 4 Libby does more for her bees in summer than in winter.
feel happy 5 Libby thinks her bees know what she looks like.
enjoy yourself 6 Libby says it’s good to have lots of bees in her hive.
an activity 7 Libby says collecting the honey is her favourite part of
beekeeping.
a(n) fun feeling
brilliant day out
exciting hobby SPEAKING
fantastic feeling
1 In pairs, prepare an interview. One of you is a journalist.

The other has an unusual hobby. Use the examples of
2 Complete the sentences with the correct
form of have, spend, be or enjoy. unusual hobbies in the box, or you can choose your own.
1 I a wonderful time at the party dog training fencing jewellery making

last night. remote-controlled vehicles
2 time with friends is my favourite
free-time activity.
3 My brother playing computer
games more than anything else and is
really good at them.
4 I most of yesterday at the beach.
It a really fun day.
5 I always fun when I see my
cousins.
6 It an amazing feeling to win the
race! I so glad I entered!
7 My dad and my brother went fishing and
they really themselves.
3 Complete the sentences so they are true

for you. In pairs, compare your answers.
1 It was a fantastic feeling when I .
2 I love spending time with .
3 The last time I had a good time was when
.
4 I always enjoy myself when I .
In the interview, the journalists must ask at least
5 My idea of a fun day out is .
five questions:
6 I was really glad when .
Tell me about…
How long have you…?
When did you…?
How do you feel about…?
Why did you…?
How did you get the idea to…?
Are you glad you…?
2 Practise your interview. Then, role-play your interview

in front of the class.
Free time 89
16 LANGUAGES OF THE WORLD
ABOUT YOU 2 Now do the quiz. Choose only one answer

for each question. Turn to page 121 to see
How do you feel about learning English?
Is it a fun hobby? your results. Do you agree with them?
Is it boring and not very useful?
Is it important for your future?
3 In pairs, compare your quiz results.
VOCABULARY AND LISTENING 4 For each question, choose the correct

answer. Read through the questions
117 before you listen.
Words to describe language learning 1 You will hear a boy called Danny
talking to his friend. How did Danny
1 Complete the quiz with the words in the box. improve his Spanish?
A by writing to his penfriend
EP B by practising online
articles
exercises
guess list
look up
meaning mistakes spell
topic translate C by spending time in Spain
2 You will hear a teacher talking to her
class. What does she want them to
work harder on?
A their grammar
B their pronunciation
C their vocabulary
3 You will hear two friends talking about
some homework. Why hasn’t the boy
done his homework?
A He forgot to make a note of it.
B He wasn’t at the lesson.
C He wrote down the wrong thing.
What kind of language learner are you? 4 You will hear a girl telling her mother
about her new friend, Yumi. What
1 When do you use English outside the classroom? languages does Yumi speak well?
A to read (1) online A English, Russian and Swedish
B when I’m on holiday abroad B Swedish, Japanese and English
C to watch English-language movies and TV shows C Japanese, Swedish and Russian
D only when I’m doing homework 5 You will hear a boy giving a classmate
2 What do you do when you find a new word in a text? some important news. How did he find
A (2) it in a dictionary out about the news?
B try to (3) what it means A from a family member
C ask my teacher to (4) it into my language B he heard it on the radio
D ask my little brother for the (5) C the teacher told him
3 What’s the best way to learn vocabulary?

A from a (6) of words
B by doing vocabulary (7)
C by reading books and magazines
D five minutes before a test 117 5 In pairs, compare your answers.
Then, listen again and check.
4 Which of these sentences do you agree with?
A It’s important to be able to (8) correctly.
B Making (9) is an important part of learning.
C Pronunciation doesn’t matter as much as grammar.
D I only learn if the (10) of the lesson is interesting.
90 UNIT 16
Present perfect and
GRAMMAR past simple 4 Complete the text with the present perfect
or past simple form of the verbs in brackets.
1 Look at the sentences from the recordings

on page 90. Which are present perfect and An amazing language learner
which are past simple?
Susanna Zaraysky (1) (study) 11
1 She lived in Sweden three years ago. languages (English, Russian, French, Spanish,
2 She learned Russian last year. Italian, Portuguese, Croatian, Ladino, Hebrew,
3 She’s spoken Japanese since she was Arabic and Hungarian) and speaks eight of them.
a baby. Susanna (2) (be) born in Russia and
4 Did you go to Spain in the holidays? first (3) (learn) English when she (4)
5 I’ve already finished mine. (move) to California. She (5) (study) French and
6 The teacher gave it to us three days ago. Spanish at school. Then, one day, she (6) (hear)
some tourists speaking in Italian and (7) (decide)
2 Complete the rules with present perfect or
past simple.
to learn that language. Portuguese came next and then
all her other languages.
Susanna (8) (write) several books and
1 We use the (9) (be) on TV many times. She (10)
a with words and phrases (have) a special interest in language and music for
like yesterday, ago, last year, in the many years. On her blog, you’ll find many interesting
holidays. articles about this, as well as video clips and language-
b with words like since, learning advice.
already, yet, just, ever.
2 We use the
a to talk about an action 5 Choose the correct verb form to complete each sentence.
that began in the past but 1 Yesterday, I have watched / watched a swimming
continues into the present. competition with my brother.
b to talk about someone’s 2 I already bought / have already bought the tickets for the
general life experiences. film tonight.
c to talk about an action 3 I’m in Melbourne, and I saw / have seen the beach and
that finished in the past. the sea.
d to talk about an action that 4 My friend John has watched / watched the competition
finished in the past, but the result is with me.
important or interesting now. 5 We have arrived / arrived home at eight o’clock in the
evening.
6 It was a great party. We have danced / danced all night
GRAMMAR REFERENCE AND PRACTICE and have eaten / ate too much food!
PAGE 146
6 Complete the conversations with the present perfect or
past simple of the verbs in brackets.
3 Match the sentences to uses a–d in part 2
of Exercise 2. 1 A: (do) your homework yet, Tania?
1 Have you done the German homework B: Yes, I (finish) it an hour ago.
yet? 2 A: Where (you go) on holiday last summer,
2 I’ve noticed you’re all using a good level Robin?
of vocabulary these days. B: We (go) to New York to visit my sister.
3 Did you meet anyone interesting? She (live) there since 2014.
4 I haven’t missed any lessons this term.
5 She’s lived all over the world! 3 A: (you ever eat) curry?
6 She hasn’t learned much English yet. B: Yes, I (have) some yesterday. Delicious!
7 I’ve just heard some amazing news! 4 A: (you enjoy) the Toy Story films when you were
8 Our French teacher has won first prize in little, Sergio?
a competition! B: I (never see) any of the Toy Story films.
9 We had a lesson with her this morning. But I (like) Despicable Me.
7 In pairs, make conversations. Ask a question in the

present perfect, and answer in the simple past. Use the
conversations in Exercise 6 for ideas.
Languages of the world 91

READING
1 Look at questions 1–4. In pairs, discuss the questions.

Then, read the texts quickly to check your answers. 2 Read the texts again and answer the questions.
1 What are the three biggest languages in the world?
1 How many languages are there in the world? How many speakers do they have?
2 What European language family does Polish belong to? 2 Which continent has the most languages?
3 Which Asian language has the most speakers? 3 Which country has the largest number of languages?
4 What are some common second languages in Africa? 4 What is special about the Basque language?
5 What has happened to some of the languages of
Australia and Oceania?
LANGUAGES of the WORLD 118
T here are around 7,000 different languages in the

other are in groups or ‘families’. Some languages
Many of the smaller languages have no writing, so
world today. Languages that are similar to each
have a lot of speakers and others have very few.
when the last speaker dies, the language dies too.
Europe Asia
language family here is Romance
Europe has 284 different languages. One Asia has 2,303 languages. Chinese has a billion
uguese and Italian. Another is Slavic
languages, which includes Spanish, Port speakers – more than any other language in
Czech.
languages, such as Russian, Polish and the world. Hindi is the world’s fourth largest
p, and is the third largest language language, and Arabic comes fifth. Some parts
English belongs to the Germanic grou
it as a first language and 505 million of Asia have a very large number of languages.
in the world: 335 million people speak
ue language from Spain and France
speak it as a second language. The Basq
language family!
is very unusual. It doesn’t belong to any
Australia
and Oceania
Salut! This area has 1,311
Bonjour! languages in total.
The main language
Hello! Ciao! of Australia and New
Zealand is English, but
there are a lot of smaller
Sannu! languages too. Papua New
Guinea has only around
Olá! 8 million people, but it
has 832 languages – more
than any other country!
Hallo! Unfortunately, some
Yaama! Aboriginal languages are
Americas very small now and have
only one or two speakers.
This area has 1,060 languages. English
and Spanish have the most speakers
on these continents. Spanish, with
Africa
406 million speakers, is the world’s
Human language probably
second-largest language. Portuguese
began on this continent. TALKING POINTS
is spoken in Brazil. While in Canada
There are 2,146 languages 12 Watch the video and discuss
people speak mainly English and
here. Many people in Africa the questions.
French. There are also many other
can speak more than one What languages do you speak?
native languages, for example Mam, a
language because, as well What languages are you studying?
Mayan language, which people speak
as their own language, they
in parts of Mexico and Guatemala. What languages do your parents speak?
also speak English, French
or Portuguese.
92 UNIT 16
SPEAKING LISTENING
1 Ask and answer with a partner.
1 You will hear a man giving some information about
1 Where do you come from? different languages. In pairs, discuss the possible answers.
2 What languages do people in your country 1 How many colour words are there in Russian and Greek?
speak? How many in English?
3 Do you enjoy studying English? 2 How many number words does the Pirahã language
4 Tell me something about what you do in of Brazil have?
your English lessons. 3 Some languages have two sets of vocabulary. Why?
4 Some languages have no words for left, right, in front of
and behind. How do they say where things are?
5 How is modern technology helping small languages?
VOCABULARY Large numbers 121

Listen and check.
1 Match the numbers to the words. WRITING

EP 176 seven billion
7,468 one hundred and seventy-six
76,000,000 seven thousand four hundred PREPARE TO WRITE
7,000,000,000 and sixty-eight Information about your English class
seventy-six million GET READY Read what a Spanish student wrote about her
English class.
2 Find and underline all the big numbers in
the text. Write them in words.
My name is María and I come from Spain.
119 3 Listen and check. Then, in pairs, practise
saying the numbers. Most of the people in my English class are
from Spain too, but one of my classmates
PRONUNCIATION
is from China and two are from Ecuador.
Word stress in numbers
The languages people speak in my class are
120 4 Listen to the numbers and underline
the stressed syllable. Can you make
Spanish, Catalan, Chinese and English. I like
a rule about the stress in numbers? speaking in English, but I find listening
thirteen thirty difficult. I plan to spend more time learning
fifteen fifty vocabulary in the future.
eighteen eighty Look at how she uses capital letters. Find examples of
nineteen ninety these uses:
• after a full stop • for nationalities
• for people’s names • for languages
5 Work in pairs. Practise saying the

numbers.
• for countries • for ‘I’
PLAN Plan a paragraph about your English class. Make
notes about:
• people’s nationalities
6 Work in pairs. Student A, say a number from
the text. Student B, close your book. Can
• languages people speak
• languages people in the class are learning
you remember what the number refers to? • your likes, dislikes, plans about learning English.
WRITE Write 50–70 words, using all your notes.
Two hundred and eighty four.
IMPROVE In pairs, read each other’s paragraphs. Check
that you have both included all the information you need
That’s the number of
and have used capital letters correctly.
languages in Europe.
Olá! Ciao! Bonjour!
Languages of the world 93

LIFE SKILLS
LEARNING
TO LEARN
EFFECTIVE What was

the first word
LEARNING you said? 122
LIFE SKILLS
To learn something well, you need to
• use a notebook • revise
• practise • try
It’s normal to make mistakes when we
H
are doing something new. But we can ave you ever thought about how babies
learn from our mistakes as well. learn to speak? For the first months of their
lives, they cry and make noises, but, in general,
children start forming words when they are
1 Think about how you learn and answer

the questions.
about 12 months old. Which are the first words
they say? Sometimes, they are the words they hear
most often, sometimes the words for things they like.
1 How did you learn that 2 x 2 = 4,
They usually start with words like mama, papa or dada.
2 x 3 = 6, 2 x 4 = 8, etc.?
2 How did you learn to ride a bicycle? Some scientists say that sounds like ma, da, pa and ba
3 How do you learn to remember names are the easiest sounds to make, so when parents are
and dates in history? very happy because their child is saying mama, in fact
the baby is just experimenting with making noises!
2 Match questions 1–3 in Exercise 1 to
answers a–c. Then match them to one of All children begin learning their language first by listening
the ideas in the Life skills box. and then speaking. They start with words for objects,
a At first, I couldn’t do it, but my brother like car or dog, then verbs for actions, like drink or eat,
helped me to go along our street every slowly adding other kinds of words to make sentences.
day until one day I could do it by myself. They can understand more difficult words and
b We said it in class and repeated it lots sentences, but they can’t say them. Some children
and lots of times. speak more than others (just like adults!) and some
c I work with a friend and we ask each children speak earlier than others, but by practising,
other questions about the things we
they all learn in the end.
learn in class.
One mother tells the story of her son who
3 Did you learn to do these things in the
same way? In pairs, discuss how you
didn’t speak until he was four years old.
Before then, he pointed when he wanted
learn.
something or just made strange noises.
4 Read the text. Circle the language skills
it mentions.
One day, he came into the kitchen for
breakfast and said, ‘Can I have some
a reading b listening chocolate cereal, please?’ And then, he
c speaking d writing never stopped chatting.
So when you start to learn another language,

remember that it took years for you to learn
yours! If you keep listening and trying hard
to speak, you improve, just like in your
own language.
94 LIFE SKILLS
9 Listen again and tick (✓) the expressions Mario
Did you know?
123
uses to make his presentation.
Babies can learn any

language. USEFUL LANGUAGE
ficult than another.
No language is more dif 1 Hello, my name’s Mario.
ir first words 2 I’m going to talk about …
Most children say the 3 The first thing I want to tell you about is …
nths old.
between 11 and 14 mo 4 Next,
chael Kearney, 5 For example,
A boy from the USA, Mi
en he was four 6 Finally,
spoke his first words wh
ed secondary school 7 To sum up,
months old and finish 8 Does anyone have any questions?
old.
when he was six years
10 Do you know any people who speak English?

Do you try to talk to them in English?
In pairs, discuss your experiences.
5 Read the text on page 94 again. Are the sentences
right (✓) or wrong (✗)?
1 Babies make their first sounds when they are
about a year old.
PROJECT Sharing
resources
2 Their first words are often words they have heard
a lot.
3 Some scientists think that babies aren’t thinking Funland
about their mother when they say mama.
4 Babies use verbs before nouns when they start Description: This
speaking. is a vocabulary
5 The boy who didn’t speak until he was four didn’t game. You
make any sounds at all.
6 You can learn a new language better if you listen have to read
more and talk less. definitions or words
and match them to the pictures.
6 Match the highlighted words in the text to the
definitions. Opinion: It’s a fun game, but you have
1 making an effort to do something to be good at fishing!
2 doing new things to find out something
3 repeating something again and again • Work in small groups.
4 talking • Individually, think of something you read in
5 making the shape of something English that was interesting – a web page,
6 increasing the number of something a blog, a game, an article, a book, etc. or
something you enjoyed watching in English –
123 7 Listen to Mario talking to his class about learning
English. Why did he improve? a video, a film, a series, a cartoon, an activity
from your coursebook, etc.
123 8 Listen again and complete the sentences. • In your group, prepare a short information
page about each idea.
1 Mario didn’t like English at first because he
• Include: the title, what it is, where you can find
couldn’t remember the and .
it (the link to a web page or a video etc.), your
2 He met the brothers at the .
opinion, photos, screenshots or drawings.
3 He wrote the words in a book and to
• Present your idea to the class. Try to use some
show the meaning.
of the expressions from Exercise 9 and be ready
4 After the holiday, he sent his new friends .
to answer any questions about it.
5 When he needed a new word, he used an .
• Create a class file for everyone and add new
6 He’s going to his friends next summer.
pages when you find other interesting things to
read or watch in English.
Effective LEARNING 95
VOCABULARY
1 Complete the sentences with a word from the box.
dollars
grams
litres
metres
pair
pounds
set
slices
1 I’ve lost my of coloured pens. Can I borrow yours?

2 There are ten of us, so let’s cut the melon into ten .
3 I think I’ve lost my new of gloves. My mum won’t be pleased!
4 The jacket was on sale for 30 and 99 cents.
5 We need 250 of flour to make the cake.
6 My dad’s nearly two tall. That’s much taller than me.
7 In our family, we drink two of milk a day. We all have it on our cereal.
8 I haven’t got any money for the bus. Can you lend me two 50 pence, please?
2 Match words from A to words in B to make verb phrases about life experiences.
A B
1 camp a cave
2 climb under the stars
3 explore wild animals
4 kayak in the snow
5 look for down a river
6 pick a tree
7 play wild fruit
8 track fossils
Now, write a sentence using each verb

phrase.
3 Look at the photos and complete the

names of the places.
1 d s 2 s s
3 m
4 c s 5 b 6 s
96 Review 4
GRAMMAR LISTENING

sentences.
1 For each question, choose the correct
answer.
124
1 They have never seen / never don’t see a city You will hear Ella and Tom talking
like it. about people’s hobbies. What is each
2 My dad has already bought / already buy the person’s hobby?
paint.
3 I have had it since / for one year. PEOPLE HOBBIES
4 Last night, my sister left / have left her bag on 0 Suzy F A collecting things
the train. B cooking
1 Jason
C doing sport
2 Laura
Correct the mistakes in the sentences. D horse riding
3 Tom
E listening to
5 I never been to a wedding and I want to come. 4 Ella
music
6 Tom left his science book at school and he 5 Maria
F photography
needs it because he doesn’t do his homework
G playing an
yet.
instrument
7 My mum has played the violin for she was six.
H shopping
8 I have texted you an hour ago, but you didn’t
answer.
WRITING
2 Write questions for the answers. Then, answer
the questions about yourself. Use never, just, yet 2 You would like to go camping next
or already in your answers. weekend.
0 Have you ever done a Saturday job? Write an email to your English friend, Sam.
No, I’ve never done a Saturday job. • Ask Sam to come with you.
1 Yes, I’ve just finished my homework. • Say where you want to go camping.
2 I’ve lived in this town for five years. • Tell Sam what to bring.
3 Yes, I have. I visited Russia in 2018 for the Write 25 words or more.
World Cup!
4 Yes, I’ve already read three English books
this year.
5 No, I’ve never cooked a pizza.
SPEAKING
6 I’ve known my best friend since I was three
years old.
3 Make questions. Then, in pairs, ask and
answer the questions.
3 Complete the text with the correct form of the
verbs in brackets. Use the past simple or present 1 How many languages / you speak?
perfect. 2 How long have you studied / spoken this /
these languages?
I (1) (love) languages since I (2)
3 your parents / grandparents / speak /
(be) a little boy. My dad is English and my mum is
same language?
Spanish, and when I was young, they (3)
4 What language(s) / they speak?
(speak) both languages to me at home. So I
5 Which languages / would / like / learn?
(4) (begin) learning English and Spanish
Why?
as a baby. Then we (5) (move) to Turkey
6 ever visit countries that speak / different
for my dad’s work, and I (6) (go) to
language?
primary school there. I (7) (learn) Turkish
7 like / learn / English?
quite quickly in school. Now, we live in Japan.
8 What / most difficult thing / about English?
I (8) (not start) learning Japanese yet.
9 What / best thing / about learning English?
But I’m going to learn it soon.
UNITS 13–16 97
17 STAYING HEALTHY
ABOUT YOU
13 Watch the video and discuss the questions.
Have you ever hurt yourself? What happened?
Have you ever had an accident?
Have you ever broken a bone?

1
Body parts 8
A
1 Match the words in the box to the body parts 1–12.
G
EP
ankle
back
blood brain
ear finger F B
heart
neck
stomach thumb toe tongue 7
11
125
126 2 Name the body parts A–H. Listen and check.
3 Work in pairs. One of you says a letter or a number, the

other says the body part. 10
9
4 Match the definitions with the words from Exercise 1.
You may need to make some of the words plural. 2
1 You’ve got ten of these on your feet.
2 Your food goes into here when you eat.
3 You think with this.
4 This joins your leg to your foot. C
5 You’ve got four of these on each hand.
6 This carries things that keep us healthy around our bodies. D
7 This joins your body to your head.

8 You’ve got one of these on each hand.
9 You hear with these.
10 This is opposite to the front of your body. 3
11 This sends blood around your body.
12 You use this to talk. 6
5 Read Ben’s blog on page 99 about what happened to him

yesterday. Which parts of his body did he hurt? H
6 Are these sentences right (✓) or wrong (✗)?

1 Ben got a bike for his birthday. 12
2 There were often quite a lot of people on the cycle path.
3 The two cyclists knocked Ben off his bike.
4 The two cyclists came back to help Ben. 5
5 Ben was able to ride his bike after the accident.
6 Ben had blood on his clothes when he got home.
4 E
98 UNIT 17
th May
Posted by Ben09 on Monday 13
This is me with my new bike – before the accident! Have you ever fallen off your bike and hurt 127
yourself? Well, here’s my story.
It was my birthday (thanks for all the texts) and this amazing bike was my present. I went for a ride
by myself along the bike path. The path isn’t usually busy. But that day there were two cyclists
coming towards me. I slowed down as quickly as possible but I forgot it was a new bike with good
brakes! I stopped really suddenly and fell off. I hit my ankle and it really hurt. The two cyclists
rode past and didn’t stop. I sat on the ground and watched their backs as they rode away. They
were enjoying themselves too much to think about me! I got up by myself and picked up my bike,
which luckily was OK. My heart was beating fast as I cycled slowly home and people were looking
at me! When I got there I found out why – there was blood all over my T-shirt from a cut on my ear.
GRAMMAR Reflexive pronouns
1 Look at the examples from Ben’s blog and

complete the Grammar box. 5 Correct the mistakes in the sentences.
Have you ever fallen off your bike and hurt 1 I bought a new shirt for me which was very nice.
yourself? 2 Our friends had a really good time together and
They were enjoying themselves too much. everybody enjoyed.
3 You need to bring a photo of you with your name.
2 Complete the table with reflexive pronouns:
himself, yourselves, herself, ourselves.
4 She went herself. No one went with her.
5 We were both hungry, so we went out and
bought us some sandwiches.
We use -self when the subject and the object of
the verb are the same / a different person.
6 Read the conversation and answer the questions.
1 What’s Sara done?
I myself we c 2 Where’s she going?
you yourself you d 3 Who’s going with her?
he a they themselves
she b Anna: Hi, Sara, are you ok?
Sara: Hi, Anna, no, not really.
I’ve hurt my big toe. Look!
GRAMMAR REFERENCE AND PRACTICE PAGE 147 Anna: Oh no, that’s horrible! Are
you going to the doctor?
Sara: Yes.
3 Look at two more examples from Ben’s blog and
match sentences 1 and 2 to meanings a and b.
Anna: Are you going by yourself?
Sara: Yes, but I’ll be fine.
1 I went for a ride by myself. Anna: No, you won’t. I’ll come with you.
2 I got up by myself.
7 In pairs, write your own conversations about
an accident.
We use the expression by myself, yourself etc. to
mean a alone or b without any help. Use the conversation in Exercise 6 to help you.
Choose different sentences from the box to
include in each conversation.
4 Complete the sentences with the correct reflexive
pronouns. Practise your conversations. Then role-play
1 Peter wasn’t badly hurt and drove to a conversation in front of the class.
the hospital.
2 Simon and I really enjoyed at the party. Help yourselves!
3 I hurt when I fell off the chair. I tried it myself and it was delicious.
4 Zoë told that she wasn’t ill. They didn’t enjoy themselves that day.
5 Ben and Sara prepared all the food by . He couldn’t do it by himself.
6 Be careful! Don’t cut with that knife! We bought ourselves new clothes after that.
7 ‘You can help to paper and pens,’ the Did she cut herself?
teacher said to the students.
Staying healthy 99
A Teen ics
Health 128
p
Today’s to
B listen
I do? Can it be dangerous to
How much exercise should
lth ier to loud music? C
Are some foods hea mes?
Is it OK to feel sad someti
than others?
1
Yes! But how do you know when it’s too loud? Can someone sitting next to you
on the train hear the music on your earphones? They can? Do they get upset?
Do they get angry? Well, then you need to make it quieter. Remember, you
need to look after your ears, so you’ll be able to hear well when you’re older.
READING
D
1 Work with a partner. Look at Today’s Topics on the

Teen Health website. What do you think the answers
to the questions are?
Adjectives to
2 Look at the questions on the Teen Health website. VOCABULARY express emotion
Match them to the paragraphs.
3 Work with a partner. Read the texts again. Tell your

partner what they say about:
1 Match the words in the box to photos A–J.
EP
1 earphones 5 feelings angry confident embarrassed
2 hearing well 6 a friend, parent friendly lazy lonely surprised
3 too much sport or teacher unhappy upset worried
4 playing sport after 7 a plate of chips
meals 8 variety 2 Complete the sentences with the adjectives
in Exercise 1.
1 I feel very today. All I want to do is
1 Do you listen to loud music on your headphones? sit here and read my book. I don’t want to
2 Do you eat healthily? What do you like to eat? do any exercise.
3 Do you do too little or enough exercise? 2 I was so when the teacher asked
me to read my story. My face went red!
3 It was my first day at the new school today
PRONUNCIATION /uː/ and /ʊ/
and everyone was really . It was
great!
129 5 Listen and repeat the sentence. Do both the oo
words have the same sound? 4 I read a lot of French magazines, so I’m
really about my French exam.
These types of food are good for you. 5 My brother doesn’t have any friends and he
gets very by himself.
What other words sound like:
6 You look . You didn’t think you’d get
a food? b good? 100% in that test did you?
7 That woman over there is very .
She’s shouting really loudly.
8 I can’t find my phone anywhere. I’m really
6 In pairs, discuss whether you agree with the website’s
answers to the teenagers’ questions. 9 You look
that I’ve lost it.
today. Usually, you’re
smiling and laughing! What’s the matter?
10 He was very when he failed the
TALKING POINTS exam. He didn’t want to talk to anyone.
Do you worry about any of these things?
What do people your age usually worry about? 3 In pairs, tell each other about different
situations when you had some of the feelings
What do you worry about? Why? in Exercise 1.
100 UNIT 17
H
2
Everyone tells you it’s not healthy to sit at the computer all day. For one
thing, it’s very lonely and can make you feel lazy. But doing too much
sport can also be bad for you. Your body is still young, so you shouldn’t
E do too much exercise. You can easily hurt something. About an hour of
sport a day is right for a teenager. You should also think about when you
do sport. For example, you can get a stomach ache if you play tennis just
F after you’ve eaten.
3
Everyone feels unhappy from time to time, so you’re not alone. Don’t
be surprised. It’s normal for your feelings to change at your age. Is there
something you’re worried about? Find a friendly person to talk to, like
your mum or dad or a teacher. You might get a bit embarrassed, but you’ll
I
be glad that you did. If you talk about your problems, they aren’t so bad.
G 4
The answer to this is yes! I’m sure you know that a plate of fruit is better J
for you than a plate of chips! But what your growing body, your heart and
your brain need is variety. If you are careful and eat a bit of everything,
then you are healthier. Don’t forget fresh fruit, vegetables and eggs! Eating
a variety of healthy food gives you energy and can help you feel confident
about studying and doing exams.
SPEAKING
LISTENING
1 Look at photos A–D below and match them to the
things the teenagers are worried about 1–4.
1 Look at the pictures. In pairs, discuss what you
can see in each one. 1 I failed my exam.
2 They haven’t picked me for the team.
2 For each question, choose the correct picture. 3 My parents don’t understand me.
1 What time is basketball practice today? 4 I think it’s broken.
130
A B C 2 Work in pairs. Take turns to be the teenager

asking a question about one of the problems in
Exercise 1 and the person giving advice. Use the
ideas in the Teen Health website and the phrases
in the box to help you.
2 Which food does the girl choose?
A B C How about … Why don’t you …
Why not …
You should …
I failed my exam. What can I do?

3 Which earphones does the boy buy?
A B C You should ask the teacher what you need
to work on. You’re always listening to music.
Maybe you should spend more time studying.
4 What’s the weather like? A B

A B C
5 What are they going to do?

A B C
C D
Staying healthy 101

18 FROM COVER TO COVER
READING
ABOUT YOU
Write a list of all the things you’ve read in the last
three days. 2 For each question choose the correct
answer.
How many books are included in your list? What kind
of books are they? 1 What is Amber doing in this message?
A telling Kat when she’ll finish her
book
B asking Kat for some advice about
a book
VOCABULARY AND READING C finding out if Kat wants to borrow
a book
Books and reading 2 What must students do?
A take the books they’ve borrowed
back to the library
1 Look at the messages, signs and notices. Where would you
see 3, 4, 5 and 6?
B collect the books they’ve ordered
from the library
1 C choose which books they want to
Kat take out of the library
I’ve just finished an amazing book – the kind you pick up 131 3 Next Tuesday, students will be able to
and then can’t put down again! I’ll lend it to you, if you want. A find out how to write a book.
Amber B listen to a well-known writer.
C get some books at a special price.
2 4 The receptionist wants people to
To: All students Reply Forward A ask if they cannot find the right
From: School secretary book.
B return books to the correct place
Everyone – please remember! If you don’t return your library after using them.
books by the end of term, you will have to pay for them. C give books back to him when
they’ve finished them.
3 5 A Every customer will get a free book
HILLCREST SCHOOL today.
B There’s a discount on all books for
The writer Jill Hadfield is speaking here next Tuesday! If today only.
you buy a book after her talk, she’ll write in it for you. C You can get three books for the price
of two today.
6 A Miss Taylor wants to give the books
4
to another class.
Put books back on the right shelves B Miss Taylor has new maths books to
when you’ve finished with them. lend to the class.
Library receptionist C Miss Taylor would like to know who
borrowed her books.
5
If you buy two books today, we’ll
give you another from this table
FOR FREE!
3 In pairs, compare your answers. Discuss
6 why you chose each answer and change
Class 9A any you think are wrong.
Everyone who took a maths textbook home,
please bring it back to school tomorrow. If you
don’t, I won’t be able to lend them to 9B.
Miss Taylor
102 UNIT 18
4 Find and underline the phrasal verbs GRAMMAR First conditional
in the texts in Exercises 1 and 2. Then
EP match each one to its meaning a–h.
1 Look at the examples of first conditional sentences. Then, find
and underline all the examples in Exercise 1 on page 102.
bring back find out give back
pick up put back put down If you buy two books today, we’ll give you another from this
take back take out table for free!
I’ll lend it to you, if you want.
a return something to a person
b lift something with your hands 2 Read the information and choose the correct answers to
the questions.
c return from somewhere with
something
d learn something new Sentences in the first conditional have two clauses:
e return something to the place you if + verb … , will + infinitive
borrowed or bought it from 1 Does the if clause have to come first?
f put something you are holding onto Yes, it does. / No, it doesn’t.
the floor or a table, for example 2 What tense do we use after if?
g return something to a place Present simple / Future simple
h remove something from somewhere We use first conditional sentences to talk about a possible
future.
5 Complete the sentences with phrasal
verbs from Exercise 4 in the correct
3 How sure are we about that future?
Very sure / Not very sure
tense.
1 Did you what we need to do
for homework? GRAMMAR REFERENCE AND PRACTICE PAGE 148
2 Can you all the books and
clothes from the floor, please?
3 My mum went to China and
3 Match the two halves of the sentences.
1 We’ll miss the film a I’ll give it to the teacher.
some great presents for us.
2 If I find your book, b if you don’t hurry.
4 How many books are you allowed to
3 I won’t tell anyone c if you can’t find yours.
of the school library?
4 If you don’t eat fast food, d you’ll be healthier.
5 My book is so exciting. I can’t
5 I’ll lend you my earphones e if you don’t want me to.
it !
6 Thanks for lending me this magazine!
I’ll it to you
4 Complete these sentences with your own ideas.
tomorrow. 1 You won’t get into the football team if …

7 My new book had several pages 2 If our team get into the final, …
missing, so I’m going to it 3 If I have time this weekend, …
to the shop. 4 I’ll lend you my jacket if …
8 When you’ve finished with my book,
can you it in my 5 Correct the mistakes in the sentences.
room? 1 If I will go, I will play with my friends.
2 I’m happy if you come to my party.
6 In pairs, go to page 122. Choose
one of the situations and write a short
3 If you join this class, you like it.
4 If you like, we would go by car.
conversation. Use at least three phrasal 5 My mum is angry if I don’t wear these trousers.
verbs in your conversation.
7 In small groups, ask and answer the

questions.
PRONUNCIATION Sentence stress
1 What’s your school library like? What 132 6 Listen to the sentences. Mark the stressed words,
then practise the sentences.
sort of books can you borrow from it?
2 Is there a library in your town? Do you 0 I’ll bring cake if you bring sandwiches.
borrow books from it? What else do 1 They’ll come if you invite them.
you do there? 2 If you pass the exam, I’ll buy you a present.
3 How do you feel about lending other 3 You’ll miss the bus if you don’t hurry.
people your books or other things? 4 If you help Tom, I’ll help Pete.
4 Do you ever borrow books or other
things from friends? Do you look after
them carefully?
7 In pairs, go to page 122 and play the If game.
From cover to cover 103

READING
READING
1 Look at the pictures of the books and try to guess
what they are about. Read the texts quickly to
check your ideas.
Write A for Natalie, B for Heidi or C for Davina.
1 Who didn’t like the way the book ended?
133
BOOKS TO MAKE YOU 2 Who plans to read more books by the same
writer?
laugh this summer 3 Who explains where she bought the book?
4 Who thought the pictures inside were excellent?
5 Who says the book is different from what she
We asked three readers to tell us about a funny usually reads?
book they enjoyed – here’s what they told us. 6 Who thinks some people may get the wrong
idea about the book?
7 Who says it didn’t take her long to read the book?
A NATALIE
My mum bought this for me for
my birthday and I knew from the TALKING POINTS
picture on the front and the title Do you like reading? If yes, what sort of books?
that I was going to love it. I read it What’s the best book you’ve ever read?
in just two days and I was really
sad when I got to the end. The
story is about a girl who has to
help her family by getting back some stolen
paintings – I found it really exciting! I’m now a
huge fan of the author, Ally Carter – I have all her
VOCABULARY Words about books
other books on my shelf ready for the summer.
1 Read the texts again and underline the words from
the box. Then, match them to the definitions 1–9.
EP
B HEIDI
author chapter cover drawings
In my opinion, this is one of the end opinion pages shelf title
funniest books ever written for
teenagers. It’s about a 15-year- 1 This is the last part of the book.
old boy who wants to start a rock 2 The words and pictures on this help you decide
band, but the adults in his life all if you want to read it.
try to stop him. Nothing goes right 3 This is the name the writer gives to the book.
for him until the very end of the 4 These pictures are done with a pen or pencil.
story. The writer is also an artist and 5 You can put your books on this.
6 You turn these as you read.
the clever drawings on each page help the story
7 This person writes books.
along. Unfortunately, the cover makes it look like
8 This is what you think or believe about something.
it’s for little kids, which is a shame as it might
9 This is one of the sections of a book that usually
stop some teenagers from picking it up. has a number or title.
2 Complete the questions with words from Exercise 1.

C DAVINA Then, in pairs, ask and answer the questions.
1 Do you listen to other people’s when you
I got this book for a great price in my local store.
choose a book to read?
It’s a funny story about a terrible girl who has to
2 Do you think books with in them are just
learn to be a better person. It’s
for little kids?
the first time I’ve tried this kind 3 Have you ever chosen a book because you think
of book, but I really enjoyed it. Of the or look interesting?
course, it’s not perfect – I wasn’t 4 Do you like books with hundreds of or do
happy with what happens in the you prefer shorter ones?
last few pages. But it was a lot of 5 Have you ever got to the of a book and
fun, and I think I’ll probably read felt sad that it was finished?
more like it in the future.
104 UNIT 18
LISTENING
134 1 Listen to the teacher talking to his class. Which of these is he

talking about?
a new book a competition a website a writer
134 2 Read the sentences. Then, listen again. Are the sentences right (✓)
or wrong (✗)?
1 If you’re under 12, you can enter the competition.
2 To win, you need to read more books than anyone else.
3 If you enter, you’ll have to buy lots of books.
4 The teacher will give the students all the instructions they need.
5 One of the prizes is a writing course.
6 You can see people’s opinions of books on the competition website.
7 You might save money if you buy a book from the website.
8 The website blog is written by teenagers who like writing stories.

1 How many books do you usually read in the long school holiday?
2 Would you like to enter a competition like this?
WRITING
PREPARE TO WRITE
A story
GET READY
Look at the pictures and read the sentences. Put the sentences in the correct order to tell the story.
a He started to feel a bit bored, so he took his book out of his bag and started reading it.
b Unfortunately, Tom was enjoying the book so much that he missed his bus, and he had to wait for the
next one.
c Tom was waiting for his bus, but it was late. There was lots of traffic because the weather was bad.
Complete each sentence with one of the linking words in blue above.
1 I’m tired this morning I read my book until midnight last night.
2 I lost my library book I had to pay for a new one.
3 I liked the writer’s first book I hated her second one.
4 the shop didn’t have the book I wanted.
5 I like books that can make me laugh cry.
PLAN You are going to write a story about the pictures on page 123.
• Look at the pictures carefully.
• Make notes about the story. Answer the questions Who?, Where? and What is happening?
• Write down key vocabulary and decide what tense to use.
WRITE Now write the story shown in the pictures on page 123. Remember to write about every picture and use
linkers. Write 35 words or more.

IMPROVE In pairs, read each other’s stories and check you have both used linking words correctly.
From cover to cover 105

CULTURE
ENGLISH LITERATURE
1 What books do you like?
2 Who wrote them?
3 Can you name some famous authors from your country?
2 Have you heard of R. J. Palacio? Have you read any of her books or seen
films of them? Read the text and complete the fact file.
R.J. Palacio
R. J. PALACIO was born in New York and still lives there with her husband, two
sons and two dogs. She studied at the High School of Art and Design and worked
for many years as a graphic designer, creating book covers. She wrote her first
book, Wonder, in 2012. R. J. is also the author of several short stories and has
recently published a picture book for younger readers called We’re All Wonders,
combining her writing and artistic talents. She wanted to be a writer for many years
but never found the time until
R. J. Palacio
one day she decided to write
FACT FILE Wonder. She says, ‘This story was
something that I wanted to say
(1) and I needed to say.’ The book BESTSE
LLER
IONAL
Nationality: THE IN
TERNAT
(2 ) is about a boy who looks very
ust.
First job: different to other teenagers and his My nam
e is Aug
k like.
(3) hat I loo
e and date): esc ri b e w
am d g,
Firs t bo ok (n experiences when he first goes to I w o n ’t
r you’re
th in k in
Whateve rse.
(4) school. The film of the book came it’s prob
a b ly w o
Other books:
(5) out in 2017. power to
move he
arts
Date of film: ‘Has the

and ch an ge minds’
n
135 Guardia
way of
to go the
‘Destined e Dog
us In ci dent of th
The Curio ight-Tim
e
in the N e Times
some’ Th
and then
3 Look at the cover of Wonder and the words on the back cover. What do they tell you about:
‘It w re ak s emotio
nal havo
c’ Indepe
ndent
1 the main character’s name? 2 what he looks like? 3 how good the book is?
4 Put the sentences about the beginning of the story in the correct order.
a He feels lonely sitting on his own, but then he meets a friendly girl called Summer.
b Jack is sorry and he and August become friends again.
c When he arrives, the principal of the school asks three students to look after him,
d 1 It’s August’s first day at his first school.
e He also meets another boy, Jack,
f who is nice to him at first but then is horrible.
g but they don’t sit with him at lunch.
h August is upset because his friend isn’t nice to him and runs away from school.
106 CULTURE
5 Read and listen to part of Chapter 2 of Wonder. Guess any words you don’t
know, or ignore them! Answer the questions.
1 Why didn’t August go to school before fifth grade?
2 Where did he study before?
3 Why doesn’t his mother draw anything now?
Why I didn’t
go to school 136
for another couple of years.

never
ext week, I start fifth grade. Since I’ve
N been to a real school before, I am pret
much totally and completely petrified
ty
. People think
Mom homeschools me. She used to
children’s-book illustrator. She dra
be a
ws really
stuff isn’t
the way I look, great fairies and mermaids. Her boy
I haven’t gone to school because of w me a
surgeries so hot, though. She once tried to dra
but it’s not that. It’s because of all the like some
born. The Darth Vader, but it ended up looking
I’ve had. Twenty-seven since I was en’t seen
even four years weird mushroom-shaped robot. I hav
bigger ones happened before I was think she’s
I’ve had two her draw anything in a long time. I
old, so I don’t remember those. But
(some too busy taking care of me and Via.
or three surgeries every year since then
school
big, some small), and because I’m littl
e for my I can’t say I always wanted to go to
. What I
age, and I have some other medical
mysteries that because that wouldn’t be exactly true
if I could
doctors never really figured out, I use
d to get sick wanted was to go to school, but only
Have
a lot. That’s why my parents decided
it was better be like every other kid going to school.
ool and
if I didn’t go to school. I’m much stro
nger now, lots of friends and hang out after sch
eight months stuff like that.
though. The last surgery I had was
e any more
ago, and I probably won’t have to hav
PROJECT A book blurb and

author fact file
A blurb is a short description about a book on

the back of its cover. It should make you want to
6 Read the text again and choose the correct options.
read the book! Write a blurb of no more than 50
1 August feels worried / confident about going to words about your favourite book.
school.
Include:
2 He has spent a lot of his life in hotels / hospitals.
• an outline of what happens in the book
3 He didn’t go to school because he was often
• why it is a good book
ill / unhappy.
4 His mother is good at drawing pictures for Find out about the book’s author and write a fact
girls / boys. file to go with your blurb. Tell your class about
5 August wants to go to school to make friends / your favourite author and read your blurb.
learn more.
TALKING POINTS
Would you like to read the book? Why / Why not?
14 NOW WATCH THE CULTURE VIDEO English Literature 107

19 DIFFERENT INGREDIENTS
Breakfast
Breakfast cereals 137
Breakfast cereals are popular in many countries. They are made from grains, such as corn, wheat and rice.
They are usually eaten with milk, or with yogurt and fruit. In the beginning, cereals were health foods,
but these days some children’s cereals are 50% sugar, and doctors say we shouldn’t eat them too often.
There are lots of kinds of cereal. This is how cereals in different shapes, like stars and balls, are made.
First, the grain is taken to the factory, where it is cleaned The shapes are baked in an oven to dry them. Then, they are
and checked. ‘puffed’ in another machine to make them light and full of air.
Then it is prepared for cooking. It is made into flour and After that, they are covered with sugar or honey. Some are
mixed with other ingredients. Water is added and the filled with chocolate. The cereal pieces are then dried in
mixture is boiled. hot air.
When it is soft, it is put into special machines which make it Finally, the cereal is packed into boxes, ready for
into shapes like stars, circles, or even letters of the alphabet. the shops.
A B C
VOCABULARY AND READING 3 In pairs, ask and answer the questions.

1 What other kinds of food do you eat for breakfast?
Words to describe cooking 2 How do you prepare them?
3 Describe the best breakfast you have ever had.
ABOUT YOU PRONUNCIATION Ways to pronounce ea

Do you eat breakfast cereals?
How often do you eat them? 138 4 Listen to the different ways to say the
letters ea.
What kinds do you like?
Do you think they are healthy? /ɪə/ ear /e/ head /iː/ seat
5 In pairs, put these words into the correct

column of the table.
1 Read the text and put photos A–C in the correct
order. beach bread breakfast
2 Look at the verbs in the text. Match them to the
definitions below. Write the verbs in the infinitive.
clean
near
eat
ready
healthy
teacher
meal
wheat
EP
1 Put one thing with another thing. /ɪə/ ear /e/ head /iː/ seat
2 Make something ready.
3 Take the water out of something.
4 Join two or more things together using a spoon
or a machine.
5 Cook something like a cake in an oven. Listen and check. Then repeat.
139
6 Cook in water.
7 Put something on top of something else.
8 Make an empty space full.
108 UNIT 19
GRAMMAR Present simple passive
3 Rewrite the sentences in the passive. You don’t
need to say who does the action.
1 Look at the sentence from the article. The verbs

are in the present simple passive. Find other
0 People throw away a lot of food these days.
A lot of food is thrown away these days.
examples of the present simple passive in the text 1 They play loud rock music in my favourite café.
on page 108 and complete the rules. 2 People often eat bread with butter and jam.
3 At my school, they serve lunch at 12.30
The grain is taken to the factory, where it is cleaned every day.
and checked. 4 Our teacher always puts our paintings on the
classroom wall.
1 To make the passive, we use the verb 5 People in Britain eat a lot of sweets and
and the of the main verb. chocolates.
2 When we use the passive, we always have to /
don’t always have to say who does the action.
4 Choose the correct options to complete each
sentence.
GRAMMAR REFERENCE AND PRACTICE PAGE 149 1 My house paints / is painted red and blue.
2 These trousers are cost / cost only £15!
3 Do you know that girl? She calls / is called Sarah.
2 Complete the text with the present simple
or present simple passive form of the verbs 4 My sister’s children call / are called Charlie and
in brackets. Karen.
5 The kitchen drawer breaks / is broken and the
How o r a n g e j u i c e cooker is not working.

6 The price of the ticket includes / is included
lunch.
is made
7 Dinner is always cooked / always cooks by my
dad.
5 Work with a partner. Invent a snack, for example

a new kind of ice cream, cake or biscuit. Draw a
picture of it and describe what it is like and how it
The oranges (1) (pull off) the trees is made. Read your description to the class.
and then they (2)
These (3)
(put) into boxes.
(send) to a factory which
6 While you are listening to the other students’
descriptions, imagine you are the manager of a
(4) (make) juice. food company. Decide which new snack you are
going to make in your factory.
At the factory, the fruit (5) (wash and
dry) and any bad oranges (6) (throw
away). After that, the fruit (7) (cut) in
half and the juice (8) (remove) by a
machine. Most factories then (9) (heat)
the juice to 94 °C. This makes it last a lot
longer (6–8 months outside the fridge). The
hot juice (10) (put) into cartons or
bottles and then left to cool.
Finally, lorries (11)
(take) the cartons to
supermarkets, where
they (12) (sell).
Different ingredients 109

READING
1 Look at the website. Whose blog is this? What is it about?

What information can you find on the website?
140
THE TASTE TEST

About me
Hello everyone!
Thank (0) you for visiting my blog. My name’s Caitlin and I’m 14. I’ve always loved cooking. (1)
I was nine, I told my parents I wanted to be (2) chef and that’s still my plan today. I especially love
making cakes and baking.
On this blog, I want to show people (3) much fun it is to cook. I also want to show them that cooking
a meal can (4) quick and easy, and that it tastes better (5) food that is made in a factory.
And remember, if you do the cooking, you don’t have to do the washing-up. That’s my rule anyway.
So go on – make a mess! I always do.
G
Don’t forget (6) leave me a message if you like anything on my website. Happy reading!
A
The best steak!

YOU NEED: HOW TO MAKE IT
1 steak per person 1 Cover the steak in salt and pepper. F
some garlic 2 Heat the grill. It needs to be hot!
a little butter 3 Grill the steak for two or three minutes on each side.
salt and pepper 4 Fry the garlic in the butter.
B 5 Serve the steak with garlic butter, fried potatoes and
green beans or carrots.
Pancakes
YOU NEED: HOW TO MAKE THEM
2 eggs 1 Mix the eggs and milk together.
E
300 ml milk 2 Add the eggs and milk to the flour.
100 g flour 3 Put some oil in a pan.
4 Cook the pancake on both sides.
5 Cover it with lemon and sugar, chocolate sauce or
D cream, or with pieces of fresh fruit, such as banana
C and raspberries.
3 Read the two recipes. Match each recipe to one

of the photos A–G. Which recipe would you like to
make? Do you know any other recipes?
2 Complete the About me text on the web page. TALKING POINTS

For each question, write the correct answer. 15 Watch the video, then discuss the
Write one word for each gap. questions.
What’s your favourite food?
Do you like to cook?
Tell me about your favourite breakfast.
110 UNIT 19
VOCABULARY Ingredients; make and do
1 Match the words in the box to photos A–H below. LISTENING

EP
beans carrots garlic
melon
pears
potatoes salt and pepper steak
1 For each question, write the correct answer in
the gap. Write one word or a number or a date
Listen and check. Then repeat. 142 or a time.
141
2 Now, write them in the table under the correct

headings. Add more words you know to each
You will hear a woman giving information
about a cooking competition.
column.
SCHOOL CHEF COMPETITION
Meat Fruit Vegetables Other
For students aged: 12–15
steak
Last date to enter: (1) June
3 Check the meaning of these words in a dictionary.

Can you find pictures of foods cooked like this on
Number of teams: (2)
Where competition will be: (3) the
EP the web page on page 110?
Name of chef: (4) John
baked
boiled
fried
grilled
roast Prizes: (5) T-shirts,
cookbooks and
4 In pairs, say what you use each thing for.
1 knife / fork / spoon
You use a knife to cut food. You use a fork to pick
food up. You use a spoon to …
2 In pairs, compare your answers. Then, listen
again and check.
2 mug / glass / cup 142
3 bowl / plate / dish
5 Put the words and phrases with make and do in
EP
the correct column in the table.
SPEAKING
the bed a cake the cleaning
a cup of tea
a mess
the dishes
a mistake
your homework
the shopping
1 You are going to enter the Junior Chef cooking
competition. Work in teams of three or four and
the washing decide on your recipe.
• What ingredients will you need for your recipe?
make do Make a list together.
a cup of tea the cleaning • How you will cook it? Write a simple recipe. Look
at the ones on page 110 to help you.
• Who will do the different jobs, such as shopping,
cutting the vegetables, cooking on the day of the
6 Which of the things in Exercise 5 do you
sometimes/often/never do?
competition, washing up … ?
• Why is it a good meal to serve in a school café?
Try to think of three reasons.
A B C D
USEFUL LANGUAGE
Can you cut the Let’s …
vegetables? That’s a great idea.
I’d prefer not to do That sounds good!
the dishes. What about …?
I’ll buy the ingredients. Why don’t we …?
E F G H I’m not sure about that.
2 Present your ideas to the class. Choose the best

dish for your school café.
Different ingredients 111

20 LIFE CHANGES
ABOUT YOU
Have you moved house or changed schools recently?
Talk to your partner about it.
VOCABULARY AND READING LIFE CHANGES 143
Hi, my name’s Joe and I’m 15. I want to tell

change as a verb and noun you about something which changed my
life. My mum always sang me songs at
1 Match sentences 1–4 to the meanings of change a–d. bedtime when I was a little boy. The songs
EP 1 I’m sorry, I can’t change a ten-pound note. weren’t written by other people. They were all
2 You’ve really changed your life. her own work. Anyway, Mum changed her job
3 Please can I change this jacket? It’s too small. and it meant we had to move from London to
4 We had to change planes in San Francisco. New York. I was very excited but sad to leave my
a take something back to a shop and get something else friends. When we were changing planes in Dublin
in its place my mum started talking to a man who worked
b give someone smaller coins when they have paid with for a record company. She told him about her
a larger coin or note songs, and he asked her to send him some of
c move from one kind of transport to another them. When we got to New York, Mum sent him
d do something very different from when you were younger some songs, and he loved them. A year later,
her first album was released and it sold a million
Now look at sentences with the noun change (5–8) and
match them to meanings e–h. copies in a week! She recorded another and soon
she was rich.
5 Remember to bring a change of shoes. It might be wet.
6 I’ll email you my change of address. Our old apartment wasn’t very comfortable and
7 That will make a change. because mum had lots of money we moved to a
8 My grandparents hate change. really big apartment with a great view of Central
Park. Then, our lives really changed. Suddenly,
e new contact details
f something interesting because it’s new everything was done for us, our food was cooked
g something becoming different by someone else, our apartment was cleaned,
h another item of similar clothing I was driven to school, Mum and I were flown
everywhere in a private plane. I know it sounds
2 Go to page 123. amazing and it is, but actually I’d like to go back
3 Look at pictures A–F in the article. In pairs, discuss

the life changes they show.
to my old life in London.
A B
4 Read the article. Which picture is about Joe’s life change?
5 Read the post again and answer the questions.

1 What did Joe remember about his bedtimes as a
little boy?
2 Why did they move from London?
3 How did Joe feel about the move?
C D
4 What happened in Dublin that changed their lives?
5 Did people like his mum’s first album? How do you know?
6 What was the new apartment like?
7 Which does he prefer, his new life or his old life?
E F
112 UNIT 20
GRAMMAR Past simple passive
1 It gave to me by my uncle.
1 Look at the example sentences from the article.
Choose the correct words to complete the rule.
2
3
My bike is stolen last year.
They were cost £25.
4 All those things are sold in yesterday’s sale.
1 Everything was done for us. 5 The school open five years ago.
2 Mum and I were flown everywhere in a
private plane.
PRONUNCIATION Sounds and spelling
The past simple passive is formed with the
present simple / past simple of the verb ‘be’ plus 6 Choose the word in each group which has
a different sound to the other words.
the past simple / past participle of the main verb.
1 buy boy by
2 which witch watch
GRAMMAR REFERENCE AND PRACTICE PAGE 150 3 hear hair here
4 would word wood
2 Find other examples of the past simple passive in
Joe’s post. How many examples tell you who did
5 know now no
6 meat meet met
the action? Why isn’t it always necessary to say 7 own one won
who did the action? 8 their there they
3 Write sentences in the past simple passive about
what happened before the day of Joe’s 16th
9
10
toe
were
too
wear
to
where
birthday. In pairs, compare your answers. Then
144
0 The guests / invite. listen and check.
The guests were invited.
1 The clothes / make. 7 In pairs, take turns to read these
sentences aloud.
2 The music / chose.
3 The cake / decorate. 1 The boys went to buy some food in the
4 The food / prepare. shop by the river.
5 The presents / buy. 2 Did you see which witch had a watch?
3 Did you hear that? You can get your hair
4 Rewrite the text, changing the verbs in italics into
the past simple passive. Decide if you need to say
cut here.
4 Would you write a word on the wood,
who did the action. Which of the four photos is please?
best for the new text? 5 I know there are no books there now.
6 You met Sophie at that café, but we can’t
meet there because I don’t eat meat.
A CHANGING GARDEN 7 She won one of her own.
8 They arrived there in their car.
The Qing Emperor Qianlong (1) designed 9 My toe hurts too much to put on those
shoes.
the Garden of Clear Ripples in the middle
10 Where were you yesterday? Did you wear
of the sixteenth century. But there was
that coat?
a war about 100 years later and people
(2) destroyed some of the garden. So the
Emperor Guangxu (3) built the garden
and the buildings again and he (4) gave
them a new name: the Summer Palace.
Empress Dowager Cixi (5) used the
Summer Palace. In 1924, someone
(6) changed it into a public park.
uangxu
Emperor G
i Garden of Clear Ripples

ger Cix Emperor Qia
s Dowa nlong
Empres Life changes 113
FACT FILE Kevin Pearce
READING Born: New Hampshire, 1st
November 1987
t snowboarding
January 1997: entered firs
1 Look at the photos. What do you learn about Kevin Pearce competition
a with brother Adam
from the fact file? 2002: moved to Californi
style event in
August 2006: won Slope
2 Read the fact file to check your ideas from Exercise 1.
New Zealand
halfpipe
January 2008: won open
in Switzerland.
KEVIN PEARCE was born in (1) serious brain injury
December 2009: received
on
145 1st November 1987. He grew up where there was plenty of
training in Utah
snow in the winter and loved snowboarding from when he w to walk, talk and
2010: had to relearn ho
was young. He entered his first snowboarding competition
swallow
when he was (2) years old. He moved to California left work to help look
with his brother in (3) and started training full-time
2010: his brother Adam
after Kevin
at Mammoth Mountain. Over the next (4) years, Festival showed
2013: the Sundance Film
he travelled a lot and won events in New Zealand and his life, The Crash Reel
Switzerland. He was a star of the snowboarding world. documentar y film about
set up Love Your
2014: Adam and Kevin
In December 2009, when Kevin was training in Utah, he Brain Foundation
crashed and was very badly (5) . He spent three ks at schools
2014 – today: giving tal
months in hospital and it took him a year to learn basic
and hospitals
skills like (6) , talking and swallowing again. His rmont
2017: moved back to Ve
brother Adam left work to help look after Kevin.
Kevin slowly got better, but he was not able to take

part in snowboarding competitions any more. In 2013,
a documentary film about his life called The Crash
Reel was (7) . A year later, a foundation called
(8) was started by Kevin and his brother Adam.
This helps people who have had brain injuries and
teaches activities like yoga and meditation.
(9) 2014, Kevin has been busy visiting schools

and hospitals. He talks about how important it is for
people to look after their brains and to wear helmets.
In 2017, he moved to (10) in Vermont.
3 Read the fact file again and complete Kevin’s biography.
4 Answer the questions about Kevin.

1 What sport did he start doing when he was a small boy?
2 Who did he go to California with?
3 What did he do at Mammoth Mountain?
4 How well known was he in the sport of snowboarding
before his accident?
5 Which part of his body did he hurt worst in the crash?
6 How long did it take before he could do basic things again?
7 Was Kevin able to return to competition snowboarding
after his accident?
8 What is The Crash Reel?
9 What kinds of things does Love Your Brain teach?
TALKING POINTS
How has Kevin’s life changed from when he was a teenager?
In pairs, discuss what you think he learned from the accident.
114 UNIT 20
VOCABULARY Life changes WRITING
1 Look at the phrases about things that happen

in people’s lives. Can you put them in order?
PREPARE TO WRITE
EP Some might happen more than once. Work A biography
with a partner and then compare your list with GET READY Look at the text about Kevin Pearce again.
another pair. 1 How many paragraphs are there?
2 What are the topics of each paragraph?
be born become a teenager 3 When in each paragraph is Kevin’s name used?
change schools find part-time work 4 When is his full name used?
get married go to high school 5 When is the pronoun he used instead of Kevin?
learn to walk and talk move house
take exams travel start school
start working or training FACT FILE Serena Williams
81
2 In pairs, compare your lists. Now, invent a story Born: 26th September 19
of someone’s life which uses all these phrases. in Michigan in the US A
to
Use the text about Kevin Pearce to help you. Tell Early 80s: family moved
your story to another pair. Los Angeles
nis
1984: began to play ten
1995: her father became
LISTENING her coach
1999: won her first
tennis title
tournament, the US Open
You will hear Tanya talking to her friend Jon
2002: won the Wimbled
on tennis tournament
r one player in
146 about her new school. 2002: became the numbe
the world
1 What time did Tanya arrive for her exam at signer label, Aneres
2004: started her own de
her new school?
A 8.30 (Serena spelt backwards)
stralian Open
B 8.40 2005 & 2007: won the Au
illiams Secondary
C 9.00 2008: opened Serena W
2 How does Tanya get to her new school at the School in Kenya
l Goodwill
moment? 2011: made Internationa
Ambassador for UNICE F
A by bike
ld medal at the
B on foot 2012: won the singles go
C by car Olympic Games
e French, Spanish
3 What can Tanya take home from school? Languages: English, som
A a musical instrument and Italian
Ohanian, one
B sports kit Family: husband – Alexis
mber 2017
C a science textbook daughter, born 1st Septe
4 What has Jon just started doing?
A playing in a band
PLAN Read the fact file for Serena Williams. You are
B playing hockey
going to write a short biography about her. Think
C working
about:
5 What reason does Jon give for wanting to • how many paragraphs you will write
stay at his school next year? • what the topic of each paragraph will be
A friends • when you will use her full name, first name and the
B a school trip pronoun she.
C his mum and dad
WRITE Write your biography. Use the passive as well
as the active in your writing.
IMPROVE In pairs, read each other’s biography
and check for mistakes. Check that you have both
included all the necessary information and that you
used paragraphs and pronouns correctly.
Life changes 115

LIFE SKILLS STUDY SKILLS
TAKING
EXAMS
LIFE SKILLS
When you have an exam you should:
• organise your time
• prepare what you need
• keep calm and don’t worry!
Taking exams can make you feel nervous or
worried. If you prepare well and relax, you
will do your best.
– studying for exams 147
1 Look at the statements. Are they true for you?

1 I have a good memory. 1 : Don’t spend too long on one topic, but
2 I find some exams difficult. do a little of each subject every day or week. Make a
3 I don’t worry about exams. timetable for the afternoons or evenings, with study
4 I can never finish exams in the time. time, eating time and include some free moments.
5 I like doing exams.
2 : It’s difficult to remember too many things
In pairs, compare your answers. at the same time, so if you have a lot of information
to learn, divide it into sections.
2 Do you think these ideas are important when
you have to study for exams? 3 : For example, draw a picture next
to a foreign word you want to remember.
1 how much you sleep Or, to remember the formula E=mc2, you could
2 what you eat write The elephant made cakes twice.
3 preparing what you need for the exam
4 organising your time 4 : We often remember better if we can see
5 talking to your teacher a kind of picture of the most important points. This
6 doing physical exercise makes it easier to connect the information in our minds.
Read the text and tick the ideas that are 5 : Healthy food gives you energy and helps you
mentioned. to concentrate.
6 Stand up every hour and move around. Have

a small snack or a short walk to clear your mind.
7 : Don’t stay up late to send messages on your

phone or play video games. It’s better to go to bed not
too late, get up early the next day and review what you
studied the day before.
8 : You can test each other on what you need

to know. For example, if you are studying history, say
the name of an important event and then your friend
can say the date, or say the date and he/she can try
to say the event.
9 : Find time to do some physical activity

at the weekend or during the week.
116 LIFE SKILLS

3 Complete the texts 1–9 with the sentences a-i.
a Make mind maps with important information
b Get plenty of sleep
c Organise your study time
d Exercise regularly to help your brain
e Have a good breakfast before you go to school
f Make sure you have breaks
g Try and learn information in small blocks
h Draw pictures or create sentences about
information you have to learn
i Revise with a friend
4 Answer the questions. Use ideas from the text on

page 116.
1 What information should you put in a study
timetable?
2 What can you do to remember foreign words?
3 What can you do in the morning when you have
an exam?
4 What should you do when you take a break from
studying?
5 What shouldn’t you do at night instead of sleeping?
6 How can friends help each other to study?
5 What do you do when you have to prepare for

exams? Talk to your partner.
148 6 Listen to the conversations and answer the

questions.
Conversation 1: W hat things did Peter and Matty
need for the exam?
Conversation 2: Why did Meg fail her exam?
Conversation 3: Did Sam answer all the questions
in the exam?
Conversation 4: What did Tim forget to do in the
exam?
Conversation 5: What advice does the teacher
give Sophie?
PROJECT A video
148 7 Listen again. Complete the expressions for giving
advice.
presentation
Make a video presentation, giving advice and

suggestions for exams.
USEFUL LANGUAGE
1 You remember to bring an extra pen. • Work in small groups.
2 I help you study for the next test? • Think about what you need to do before an
3 You know that you guess? exam, during an exam or at the end of an exam.
4 You make sure you’ve • In your group, prepare a short video
done everything. presentation with the best advice for your class.
5 If I you, I’d look at the clock. You can record this on your phones, and you
can have a conversation or explain the ideas
individually.
• Show your video to the class and be ready to
answer any questions about it.
• After you see the video, tell the other groups
the ideas you liked.
taking EXAMS 117

VOCABULARY GRAMMAR
1 Put the letters in order to make words for

parts of the body.
1 Choose the correct options to complete the sentences.
1 You must bring your pyjamas and clean clothes for
1 outhm 7 eadh you / yourself.
2 mtuhb 8 ranib 2 If it will be / is all right, I’ll meet you in the restaurant.
3 grinfse 9 thare 3 The batteries include / are included in the price.
4 cekn 10 dolob 4 This present gave / was given to me by my father.
5 esto 11 cakb
6 are 12 nekal Correct the mistakes in the sentences.
5 I bought a blue shirt for me, which is very nice.
2 Look at the words. Which words are used to
talk about books (B) and which words are
6 If you like, we go by car.
7 You like the class if you come.
used to talk about preparing food (F)? 8 You need to bring a photo of you with your name on
the back.
bowl chapter cover knife
plate
shelf spoon title 2 Complete the sentences with the verbs in the box.
Use the past passive.
Now, match the words to the definitions.

bake
find make
open
sell
write
1 This is a section of a book that has a
number or title. 1 That book by my mother. She’s an author.
2 We put soup in this. 2 Her bike in the park after she lost it.
3 We use this to cut our food. 3 The cakes for too long!
4 We put books on this. 4 The new school last week.
5 We eat our food off this. 5 My phone (not) in this country. It’s from
6 This is the name of a book. South Korea.
7 This is the front and back of a book. 6 The paintings for a lot of money.
8 We use this to eat soup and ice cream. 3 Complete the text with the correct form of the verbs
in brackets. Use the present simple active or present
simple passive.
3 Complete the sentences with the correct
form of the words in the box.
S IN AN
WHAT HAPPEN
ice crea m y ?
be born change schools find out
find part-time work give back
fac t o r
take back
take exams take out
1 He only the name of the book

yesterday. He didn’t know it before.
2 Please can I borrow your maths book?
I it to you tomorrow. First, the cream, eggs and sugar (1) (mix)
together in a big machine. Then, the mixture
3 We our English last
(2) (cook) to kill any bacteria and make it
week. I hope everyone passed.
safe to eat. After this, the flavourings (3)
4 I (not) last year. We moved house,
(add). These (4) (include) chocolate, vanilla,
but I stayed at the same school.
coffee, mint and of course fruit of all kinds. Some
5 Please can you the forks from the ice cream makers also (5) (put) pieces of
drawer and put them on the table? marshmallow or whole nuts in their ice cream.
6 My grandmother on 15th June
1962. The next step is very important. The ice cream
7 Some teenagers like to in the (6) (freeze) and mixed at the same time in
holidays so they have money to buy things. a special machine. After it (7) (come) out of
8 (you) your library book yesterday? the machine, it (8) (put) into boxes and then
into a big freezer. When it is very cold and hard, it
(9) (send) to the shops for us to buy.
Around 13 billion litres of ice cream (10)
(sell) every year around the world.
118 Review 5
READING LISTENING
1 For each question, write the correct answer.
Write one word for each gap.
3 For each question, write the correct
answer in the gap. Write one word or a
Example: 0 of 149 number or a date or a time.
You will hear a woman talking to a class of
students about the history of her town.
To: Dave Reply Forward
From: Sally
Subject:
Mrs Smith’s town
I’m sorry I didn’t see you on the last day Years Mrs Smith has lived in the town:
(0) term to say goodbye. I hope (0) 60 years
you have a really lovely summer holiday in
the mountains (1) your family. I’m Age of town: (1) years
sure it (2) be sunny and warm.
We’re going to London for a week. I’m very Town in 1980
excited because it’s my first visit there. Number of people: (2)
I want (3) see all the famous
Day shops closed: (3)
places. We went to Madrid last year, and
that was really interesting, (4) it Name of old cinema: (4) the
was too hot for me. I hope London won’t
Cost of cinema seat: £ (5)
(5) so warm.
See (6) next term!
Sally
SPEAKING
2 Work with a partner. Take turns to ask and answer
the questions.
Tell your partner about health and fitness.
What exercise do you do to stay healthy?
Which foods keep you healthy?
Have you ever hurt any part of your body?
How do you get to school every day?
Tell your partner about books.
What kind of books or comics do you like reading?
Where is your favourite place to read?
Do you prefer reading on a screen to reading real
books? Why?
What is the best book you have read?
Tell your partner about food.
Describe your favourite meal.
What food can you cook?
Who’s the best cook in your family?
Which country’s food do you like best?
UNITS 17–20 119

EXTRA ACTIVITIES
UNIT 2 PAGE 17, EXERCISE 3

Student A
Ask your partner for information about the sand
cat to write a fact file. Make a note of the answers.
FACT FILE Kakapo
Then, answer your partner’s questions about the
t
kakapo. Use the information on the right: What is it: A kind of parro
From: New Zealand
islands
Lives: only on two small
s
Eats: plants, fruit and nut
Adult weight: 2–4 kg
kapos left in the wild,
Numbers: about 127 ka
none in zoos
chicks. Females
Kakapo babies are called
years. The chicks
have 2–3 chicks every two
10 weeks.
stay with their mother for
Work with a partner. Take turns to make sentences.

Use one of the verbs in box A and the correct form of a comparative or superlative adverb made from the adjectives
in box B.
B
A sing bad
dance loud
speak careful
eat noisy
study dangerous
laugh quick
walk fast
learn quiet
write good
run slow
Complete the sentences with the words in the box. Use each word twice.
book
kind
picture
ring
watch
1 Sorry, I’m busy now. I’ll you later.

2 You can draw a of your time capsule, if you like.
3 She’s really . She lent me her favourite jacket for the party.
4 I don’t want to TV. I’d prefer to listen to some music.
5 When you phone the cinema, can you a ticket for me, too, please?
6 What of soup would you like? Vegetable or chicken?
7 That’s a beautiful you’ve got on your finger.
8 Can I borrow your maths ? I left mine at home.
9 I’ll take a of it with my phone.
10 I’m sorry, I don’t know what the time is. My is broken.
120 EXTRA ACTIVITIES

In pairs, imagine you are setting up a sport or activity club at your school. Choose the sport or activity, then think of
a name for your club. Write some rules for your club. Tell another pair about your club. Whose club sounds most fun?
PAGE 67, EXERCISE 3

UNIT 11
Play this game. Work in pairs. Student A chooses an uncountable noun from Exercise 1. Student B must ask a
question beginning How many …? using a related countable noun. Student A answers the question.
A: homework
B: How many maths exercises did you do last night?
A: Eight!
In small groups, design your own cinema. Think about:

• where your cinema will be
• the kind of films you’d like to show
• extra activities you might offer
• what you could sell
• the kind of seats you’ll have.
Choose one person from your group to present your ideas to the class.
We’ll have shops that sell …
We’ll show films that …
People who come to our cinema will …
Our cinema will be in a place which …
PAGE 90, EXERCISE 2

UNIT 16
Scores: 12–16 You are a very serious language learner. You will do very well in
your studies, but remember you can have fun when you are learning
Add up your scores
English! It’s not all about getting the best mark in the class.
A 4
8–11 You enjoy learning English. You are happy to try new ways of
B 3 learning and you are not afraid to make mistakes. You like using the
C 2 language in real situations.
D 1 4–7 English probably isn’t your favourite subject, but if you work hard,
you can be good at it. Study a little but often, and you’ll soon see the
difference!
EXTRA ACTIVITIES 121

EXTRA ACTIVITIES

Student B
Answer your partner’s questions about the sand cat.
Use the information on the right. Then ask your partner
FACT FILE Sand cat
for information about the kakapo to write a fact file.
Make a note of the answers. What is it: a kind of cat
From: Africa, Asia
Lives: in deserts
er small animals
Eats: insects, birds and oth
Adult weight: 1–3 kg
how many there are
Numbers: No one knows
in the wild; 200 in zoos.
kittens.
Sand cat babies are called
every year. The kittens
Females have 18 kittens
about six months.
stay with their mother for

1 Student A Student B has got one of your books and you want it back by tomorrow at
the latest.
Student B You don’t know where the book is! Don’t tell Student A the truth! Try to get
more time to return the book.
2 Student A You want a book that Student B has borrowed from the library. You think
Student B has had it for a very long time and want him/her to return it to
the library so you can borrow it.
Student B You borrowed a book from the school library and Student A wants it. You
haven’t finished with it yet and want to keep it for as long as possible.
The If game. Choose a sentence from 1–3 below and complete it.
Then start a new sentence with the second part of your first sentence. Then write two more sentences.
If I have a party on my birthday, I’ll …
If I have a party on my birthday, I’ll ask all my friends.
If I ask all my friends, we’ll make a lot of noise.
1 If I have enough money, I’ll buy …
2 If I pass all my exams, I’ll …
3 If I move to a new class next year, I’ll …
In pairs, compare your answers.
122 EXTRA ACTIVITIES

UNIT 18 PAGE 105, WRITING
Write a sentence for each of these situations.

A time when you:
• changed something in a shop.
• changed from one kind of transport to another of the same type.
• made a big or small change in your life, either because you wanted to or because someone else made it happen.
For example, had a hair cut, moved things around in your bedroom.
• had to take a change of clothes somewhere.
• had to give someone a change of email address or change of phone number.
• enjoyed something because it was new or different.
• talked to someone who liked things in the past and didn’t like life changing today, e.g computers, smartphones.
Last year, my parents bought me a jacket for my birthday, but I didn’t like it. So, I changed it for a different jacket that
I really liked.
In groups, discuss your sentences for Exercise 2. Are any of them the same?
All these things have changed people’s lives. In pairs, discuss each one and decide how important it is for our lives
today. Decide which is the most important. What other things would you add to the list?
DNA was discovered.
The internet was created.
Electricity was discovered.
The steam engine was developed.
Air conditioning was invented.
EXTRA ACTIVITIES 123

EP VOCABULARY LIST
parrot /ˈpærət/ noun
UNIT 1 penguin /ˈpeŋɡwɪn/ noun
polar bear /ˈpəʊlə beə/ noun
ADJECTIVES OF PERSONALITY
snake /sneɪk/ noun
active /ˈæktɪv/ adjective
tiger /ˈtaɪɡə/ noun
creative /kriˈeɪtɪv/ adjective
whale /weɪl/ noun
friendly /ˈfrendli/ adjective
funny /ˈfʌni/ adjective
helpful /ˈhelpfəl/ adjective UNIT 3
kind /kaɪnd/ adjective
lazy /ˈleɪzi/ adjective HOLIDAYS: WAYS OF TRAVELLING
polite /pəˈlaɪt/ adjective by bike /baɪ ˈbaɪk/ adverb
popular /ˈpɒpjələ/ adjective by boat /baɪ ˈbəʊt/ adverb
quiet /kwaɪət/ adjective by coach /baɪ ˈkəʊtʃ/ adverb
by helicopter /baɪ ˈhelɪkɒptə/ adverb
PERSONAL DETAILS
by motorbike /baɪ ˈməʊtəbaɪk/ adverb
address /əˈdres/ noun
by plane /baɪ ˈpleɪn/ adverb
age /eɪdʒ/ noun
by scooter /baɪ ˈskuːtə/ adverb
email address /ˈiːmeɪl əˈdres/ noun
by ship /baɪ ˈʃɪp/ adverb
first language /ˈfɜːst ˈlæŋɡwɪdʒ/ noun
by tram /baɪ ˈtræm/ adverb
first name /ˈfɜːst neɪm/ noun
by underground /baɪ ˈʌndəɡraʊnd/ adverb
home telephone /ˈhəʊm ˈtelɪfəʊn/ noun
mobile /ˈməʊbaɪl/ noun HOLIDAY VOCABULARY
surname /ˈsɜːneɪm/ noun guest /ɡest/ noun
guidebook /ˈɡaɪdbʊk/ noun
luggage /ˈlʌɡɪdʒ/ noun
UNIT 2 map /mæp/ noun
on foot /ɒn ˈfʊt/ adverb
GEOGRAPHICAL FEATURES
receptionist /rɪˈsepʃənɪst/ noun
desert /ˈdezət/ noun
suitcase /ˈsuːtkeɪs/ noun
forest /ˈfɒrɪst/ noun
tourist /ˈtʊərɪst/ noun
hill /hɪl/ noun
visitor /ˈvɪzɪtə/ noun
lake /leɪk/ noun
mountain /ˈmaʊntɪn/ noun
river /ˈrɪvə/ noun UNIT 4
sea /siː/ noun
valley /ˈvæli/ noun HOMES
volcano /vɒlˈkeɪnəʊ/ noun balcony /ˈbælkəni/ noun
ceiling /ˈsiːlɪŋ/ noun
ANIMALS
cooker /ˈkʊkə/ noun
dolphin /ˈdɒlfɪn/ noun
cupboard /ˈkʌbəd/ noun
elephant /ˈelɪfənt/ noun
entrance /ˈentrəns/ noun
giraffe /dʒɪˈrɑːf/ noun
first floor /ˈfɜːst flɔː/ noun
monkey /ˈmʌŋki/ noun
garage /ˈɡærɑːʒ/ noun
124 VOCABULARY LIST

ground floor /ˈɡraʊnd flɔː/ noun
lamp /læmp/ noun
UNIT 6
sink /sɪŋk/ noun
MATERIALS
sofa /ˈsəʊfə/ noun
cotton /ˈkɒtən/ noun / adjective
ADJECTIVES TO DESCRIBE HOMES glass /ɡlɑːs/ noun / adjective
attractive /əˈtræktɪv/ adjective gold /ɡəʊld/ noun / adjective
bright /braɪt/ adjective leather /ˈleðə/ noun / adjective
cold /kəʊld/ adjective metal /ˈmetəl/ noun / adjective
comfortable /ˈkʌmftəbl/ adjective paper /ˈpeɪpə/ noun / adjective
cool /kuːl/ adjective plastic /ˈplæstɪk/ noun / adjective
cosy /ˈkəʊzi/ adjective silver /ˈsɪlvə/ noun / adjective
dark /dɑːk/ adjective wood /wʊd/ noun
light /laɪt/ adjective wool /wʊl/ noun / adjective
peaceful /ˈpiːsfəl/ adjective
ADJECTIVES FOR DESCRIBING OBJECTS
tiny /ˈtaɪni/ adjective
colourful /ˈkʌləfəl/ adjective
unusual /ʌnˈjuːʒuəl/ adjective
hard /hɑːd/ adjective
warm /wɔːm/ adjective
heavy /ˈhevi/ adjective
large /lɑːdʒ/ adjective
UNIT 5 little /ˈlɪtl/ adjective
lovely /ˈlʌvli/ adjective
SCHOOL SUBJECTS old /əʊld/ adjective
biology /baɪˈɒlədʒi/ noun pretty /ˈprɪti/ adjective
chemistry /ˈkemɪstri/ noun round /raʊnd/ adjective
design and technology /dɪˈzaɪn ən tekˈnɒlədʒi/ noun small /smɔːl/ adjective
drama /ˈdrɑːmə/ noun smooth /smuːð/ adjective
foreign languages /ˈfɒrɪn ˈlæŋɡwɪdʒɪz/ noun soft /sɒft/ adjective
geography /dʒiˈɒɡrəfi/ noun wooden /ˈwʊdən/ adjective
history /ˈhɪstəri/ noun
ICT /ˌaɪsiːˈti/ noun
maths /mæθs/ noun
UNIT 7
PE /ˌpiːˈiː/ noun
GET
physics /ˈfɪzɪks/ noun
get back [= arrive home] /ɡet ˈbæk/ phrasal verb
science /ˈsaɪəns/ noun
get lost /ɡet ˈlɒst/ phrasal verb
TAKE get on [+ form of transport] /ˈɡet ɒn/ phrasal verb
take [= carry, e.g. an umbrella] /teɪk/ verb get to [= arrive at] /ˈɡet tə/ phrasal verb
take [= catch, e.g. a train] /teɪk/ verb get up [= leave the bed] /ɡet ˈʌp/ phrasal verb
take [= do, e.g. exams] /teɪk/ verb
HOLIDAY ACTIVITIES
take [= go along, e.g. the second turning] /teɪk/ verb
camping /ˈkæmpɪŋ/ noun
take [= make, e.g. a photo/picture] /teɪk/ verb
diving /ˈdaɪvɪŋ/ noun
take [= study, e.g. maths] /teɪk/ verb
hiking /ˈhaɪkɪŋ/ noun
take [= use, e.g. medicine] /teɪk/ verb
VOCABULARY LIST 125

EP VOCABULARY LIST
horse riding /ˈhɔːs ˈraɪdɪŋ/ noun WORDS WITH TWO MEANINGS
kite surfing /ˈkaɪt ˈsɜːfɪŋ/ noun book [= for reading] /bʊk/ noun
mountain biking /ˈmaʊntɪn ˈbaɪkɪŋ/ noun book [= reserve] /bʊk/ verb
paddle boarding /ˈpædl ˈbɔːdɪŋ/ noun kind [= nice] /kaɪnd/ adjective
sailing /ˈseɪlɪŋ/ noun kind [= variety] /kaɪnd/ noun
waterskiing /ˈwɔːtəˌskiːɪŋ/ noun letter [= in the mail] /ˈletə/ noun
zip wiring /ˈzɪp ˈwaɪərɪŋ/ noun letter [= part of writing] /ˈletə/ noun
picture [= drawing] /ˈpɪktʃə/ noun
THINGS TO TAKE ON AN ADVENTURE HOLIDAY
picture [= photo] /ˈpɪktʃə/ noun
backpack /ˈbækpæk/ noun
ring [= jewellery] /rɪŋ/ noun
first-aid kit fɜːst ˈeɪd kɪt/ noun
ring [= phone] /rɪŋ/ verb
map and compass /ˈmæp ən ˈkʌmpəs/ noun
watch [= for the time] /wɒtʃ/ noun
sleeping bag /ˈsliːpɪŋ bæɡ/ noun
watch [= look at] /wɒtʃ/ verb
snacks /snæks/ noun
sun cream /ˈsʌn kriːm/ noun
tent /tent/ noun UNIT 9
torch /tɔːtʃ/ noun
trainers /ˈtreɪnəz/ noun SPORTS AND ACTIVITIES
walking boots /ˈwɔːkɪŋ buːts/ noun badminton /ˈbædmɪntən/ noun
wash bag /ˈwɒʃbæɡ/ noun board game /ˈbɔːd ɡeɪm/ noun
waterproof trousers and jacket /ˈwɔːtəpruːf ˈtraʊzəz card game /ˈkɑːd ɡeɪm/ noun
ən ˈdʒækɪt/ noun
climbing /ˈklaɪmɪŋ/ noun
cricket /ˈkrɪkɪt/ noun
UNIT 8 dance class /ˈdɑːns klɑːs/ noun
diving /ˈdaɪvɪŋ/ noun
FURNITURE AND HOUSEHOLD APPLIANCES fishing /ˈfɪʃɪŋ/ noun
air conditioning /eə kənˈdɪʃənɪŋ/ noun fitness class /ˈfɪtnəs klɑːs/ noun
barbecue /ˈbɑːbɪkjuː/ noun golf /ɡɒlf/ noun
bin /bɪn/ noun karate /kəˈrɑːti/ noun
bookcase /ˈbʊkkeɪs/ noun puzzle /ˈpʌzl/ noun
drawer /drɔː/ noun skateboarding /ˈskeɪtbɔːdɪŋ/ noun
fridge /frɪdʒ/ noun skiing /ˈskiːɪŋ/ noun
heating /ˈhiːtɪŋ/ noun video game /ˈvɪdiəʊ ɡeɪm/ noun
lights /laɪts/ noun
SPORTS VOCABULARY
roof /ruːf/ noun
champion /ˈtʃæmpiən/ noun
seat /siːt/ noun
fan /fæn/ noun
stairs /steəz/ noun
prize /praɪz/ noun
washing machine /ˈwɒʃɪŋ məˈʃiːn/ noun
professional /prəˈfeʃənəl/ adjective
take part /teɪk ˈpɑːt/ verb
tournament /ˈtʊənəmənt/ noun
126 VOCABULARY LIST

SUFFIX -ER
UNIT 11
cleaner /ˈkliːnə/ noun
climber /ˈklaɪmə/ noun
PLACES IN A CITY
dancer /ˈdɑːnsə/ noun
art gallery /ˈɑːt ˈɡæləri/ noun
diver /ˈdaɪvə/ noun
cathedral /kəˈθiːdrəl/ noun
golfer /ˈɡɒlfə/ noun
embassy /ˈembəsi/ noun
photographer /fəˈtɒɡrəfə/ noun
fountain /ˈfaʊntɪn/ noun
runner /ˈrʌnə/ noun
mosque /mɒsk/ noun
singer /ˈsɪŋə/ noun
old town /ˈəʊld ˈtaʊn ˈsentə / noun
skier /ˈskiːə/ noun
palace /ˈpælɪs/ noun
swimmer /ˈswɪmə/ noun
shopping area /ˈʃɒpɪŋ ˈeəriə/ noun
teacher /ˈtiːtʃə/ noun
skyscraper /ˈskaɪˌskreɪpə/ noun
worker /ˈwɜːkə/ noun
sports centre /ˈspɔːts ˈsentə/ noun
stadium /ˈsteɪdiəm/ noun
UNIT 10 statue /ˈstætʃuː/ noun
temple /ˈtempl/ noun
PEOPLE
UNCOUNTABLE NOUNS
best friend /ˈbest ˈfrend/ noun
electricity /ɪˌlekˈtrɪsəti/ noun
classmate /ˈklɑːsmeɪt/ noun
food /fuːd/ noun
close friend /ˈkləʊs ˈfrend/ noun
furniture /ˈfɜːnɪtʃə/ noun
contact [= person you know] /ˈkɒntækt/ noun
homework /ˈhəʊmwɜːk/ noun
guest /ɡest/ noun
information /ˌɪnfəˈmeɪʃən/ noun
member /ˈmembə/ noun
jewellery /ˈdʒuːəlri/ noun
neighbour /ˈneɪbə/ noun
luggage /ˈlʌɡɪdʒ/ noun
ˈold, friend /əʊld frend/ noun
money /ˈmʌni/ noun
penfriend /ˈpenfrend/ noun
news /njuːz/ noun
relative /ˈrelətɪv/ noun
staff /stɑːf/ noun
INTERNET NOUNS AND VERBS traffic /ˈtræfɪk/ noun
blog /blɒɡ/ noun wildlife /ˈwaɪldlaɪf/ noun
download /ˌdaʊnˈləʊd/ verb
link /lɪŋk/ noun
UNIT 12
menu /ˈmenjuː/ noun
message board /ˈmesɪdʒ bɔːd/ noun
TYPES OF FILM
post /pəʊst/ verb
a comedy /ə ˈkɒmədi/ noun
record /rɪˈkɔːd/ verb
a drama /ə ˈdrɑːmə/ noun
save /seɪv/ verb
a horror film /ə ˈhɒrə fɪlm/ noun
search /sɜːtʃ/ verb
a musical /ə ˈmjuːzɪkəl/ noun
site /saɪt/ noun
a science-fiction film /ə ˌsaɪəns ˈfɪkʃən fɪlm/ noun
the web /ðə ˈweb/ noun
a thriller /ə ˈθrɪlə/ noun
upload /ʌpˈləʊd/ verb
VOCABULARY LIST 127

EP VOCABULARY LIST
an action film /ən ˈækʃən fɪlm/ noun
an adventure film /ən ədˈventʃə fɪlm/ noun
UNIT 14
an animated film /ən ˈænɪmeɪtɪd fɪlm/ noun
SHOPS
CONJUNCTIONS bakery /ˈbeɪkəri/ noun
and /ənd/ conjunction bookshop /ˈbʊkʃɒp/ noun
because /bɪˈkəz/ conjunction butcher’s /ˈbʊtʃəz/ noun
but /bʌt/ conjunction café /ˈkæfeɪ/ noun
if /ɪf/ conjunction chemist’s /ˈkemɪsts/ noun
or /ɔː/ conjunction clothes shop /kləʊðz ʃɒp/ noun
so /səʊ/ conjunction department store /dɪˈpɑːtmənt ˈstɔː/ noun
that /ðæt/ conjunction market /ˈmɑːkɪt/ noun
when /wen/ conjunction newsagent’s /ˈnjuːzˌeɪdʒənts/ noun
where /weə/ conjunction shoe shop /ˈʃuː ʃɒp/ noun
while /waɪl/ conjunction supermarket /ˈsuːpəˌmɑːkɪt/ noun
sweet shop /ˈswiːt ʃɒp/ noun
UNIT 13 UNITS OF MEASUREMENT

a pair of /ə ˈpeər əv/ noun
OUTDOOR ACTIVITIES a set of /ə ˈset əv/ noun
camp under the stars /ˈkæmp ˈʌndə ðə ˈstɑːz/ verb phrase a slice of /ə ˈslaɪs əv/ noun
climb a tree /ˈklaɪm ə ˈtriː/ verb phrase a variety of /ə vəˈraɪəti əv/ noun
explore a cave /ɪkˈsplɔːr ə ˈkeɪv/ verb phrase centimetres /ˈsentɪˌmiːtəz/ noun
kayak down a river /ˈkaɪæk daʊn ə ˈrɪvə/ verb phrase dollars and cents /ˈdɒləz ən ˈsents/ noun
look for fossils /ˈlʊk fə ˈfɒsəlz/ verb phrase euros and cents /ˈjʊərəʊz ən ˈsents/ noun
pick wild fruit /ˈpɪk ˈwaɪld ˈfruːt/ verb phrase grams /ɡræmz/ noun
play in the snow /ˈpleɪ ɪn ðə ˈsnəʊ/ verb phrase kilograms /ˈkɪləʊɡræmz/ noun
record birdsong /rɪˈkɔːd ˈbɜːdsɒŋ/ verb phrase kilometres /ˈkɪləˌmiːtəz/ noun
track wild animals /ˈtræk ˈwaɪld ˈænɪməlz/ verb phrase litres /ˈliːtəz/ noun
try rock climbing /traɪ ˈrɒk ˈklaɪmɪŋ/ verb phrase metres /ˈmiːtəz/ noun
millilitres /ˈmɪlɪˌliːtəz/ noun
PAST PARTICIPLES
pounds and pence /ˈpaʊndz ən ˈpens/ noun
be /biː/ verb → been / biːn/ verb
break /breɪk/ verb → broken /ˈbrəʊkən/ verb
eat /iːt/ verb → eaten /iːtən/ verb UNIT 15
fly /flaɪ/ verb → flown /fləʊn/ verb
grow /ɡrəʊ/ verb → grown /ɡrəʊn/ verb FREE-TIME ACTIVITIES
have /hæv/ verb → had /hæd/ verb chatting /ˈtʃætɪŋ/ noun
make /meɪk/ verb → made /meɪd/ verb collecting things /kəˈlektɪŋ ˈθɪŋz/ noun phrase
meet /miːt/ verb → met /met/ verb cooking /ˈkʊkɪŋ/ noun
ride /raɪd/ verb → ridden /ˈrɪdən/ verb dancing /ˈdɑːnsɪŋ/ noun
send /send/ verb → sent /sent/ verb going out with friends /ˈɡəʊɪŋ aʊt wɪð ˈfrendz/ noun phrase
sleep /sliːp/ verb → slept /slept/ verb going shopping /ˈɡəʊɪŋ ˈʃɒpɪŋ/ noun phrase
swim /swɪm/ verb → swum /swʌm/ verb
128 VOCABULARY LIST

listening to music /ˈlɪsənɪŋ tə ˈmjuːzɪk/ noun phrase mistake /mɪˈsteɪk/ noun
photography /fəˈtɒɡrəfi/ noun spell /spel/ verb
playing an instrument /ˈpleɪɪŋ ən ˈɪnstrəmənt/ noun phrase topic /ˈtɒpɪk/ noun
playing computer games /ˈpleɪɪŋ kəmˈpjuːtə ɡeɪmz/ translate /trænzˈleɪt/ verb
noun phrase
playing sport /ˈpleɪɪŋ ˈspɔːt/ noun phrase LARGE NUMBERS
reading books /ˈriːdɪŋ ˈbʊks/ noun phrase billion /ˈbɪliən/ noun
singing /ˈsɪŋɪŋ/ noun hundred /ˈhʌndrəd/ noun
spend time doing something /spend taɪm ˈduːɪŋ million /ˈmɪljən/ noun
ˈsʌmθɪŋ/ verb phrase thousand /ˈθaʊzənd/ noun
spending time online /ˈspendɪŋ taɪm ɒnˈlaɪn/ noun
phrase
watching TV /ˈwɒtʃɪŋ ˌtiːˈviː/ noun phrase UNIT 17
COLLOCATIONS ABOUT HAVING FUN
BODY PARTS
a brilliant day out /ə ˈbrɪliənt deɪ ˈaʊt/ collocation
ankle /ˈæŋkl/ noun
a brilliant hobby /ə ˈbrɪliənt ˈhɒbi/ collocation
back /bæk/ noun
a fantastic feeling /ə fænˈtæstɪk ˈfiːlɪŋ/ collocation
blood /blʌd/ noun
a fun day out /ə ˈfʌn deɪ ˈaʊt/ collocation
brain /breɪn/ noun
a fun hobby /ə ˈfʌn ˈhɒbi/ collocation
ear /ɪə/ noun
an exciting day out /ən ɪkˈsaɪtɪŋ deɪ ˈaʊt/ collocation
finger /ˈfɪŋɡə/ noun
an exciting hobby /ən ɪkˈsaɪtɪŋ ˈhɒbi / collocation
heart /hɑːt/ noun
be glad /biː ˈɡlæd/ collocation
mouth /maʊθ/ noun
be happy /biː ˈhæpi/ collocation
neck /nek/ noun
enjoy an activity /ɪnˈdʒɔɪ ən ækˈtɪvəti/ collocation
stomach /ˈstʌmək/ noun
enjoy yourself /ɪnˈdʒɔɪ jɔːˈself/ collocation
thumb /θʌm/ noun
feel happy /ˈfiːl ˈhæpi/ collocation
toe /təʊ/ noun
have a great time /ˈhæv ə ˈɡreɪt ˈtaɪm/ collocation
tongue /tʌŋ/ noun
have a laugh /ˈhæv ə ˈlɑːf/ collocation
have fun /ˈhæv ˈfʌn/ collocation ADJECTIVES TO EXPRESS EMOTION
making things /ˈmeɪkɪŋ ˈθɪŋz/ noun phrase angry /ˈæŋɡri/ adjective
spend time with someone /spend ˈtaɪm wɪð ˈsʌmwʌn/ confident /ˈkɒnfɪdənt/ adjective
collocation
embarrassed /ɪmˈbærəst/ adjective
friendly /ˈfrendli/ adjective
UNIT 16 lazy /ˈleɪzi/ adjective
lonely /ˈləʊnli/ adjective
WORDS TO DESCRIBE LANGUAGE LEARNING surprised /səˈpraɪzd/ adjective
article /ˈɑːtɪkl/ noun unhappy /ʌnˈhæpi/ adjective
exercise /ˈeksəsaɪz/ noun upset /ʌpˈset/ adjective
guess /ɡes/ verb worried /ˈwʌrid/ adjective
list /lɪst/ noun
look up /'lʊk ʌp/ verb
meaning /ˈmiːnɪŋ/ noun
VOCABULARY LIST 129

EP VOCABULARY LIST
garlic /ˈɡɑːlɪk/ noun
UNIT 18 melon /ˈmelən/ noun
pears /peəz/ noun
BOOKS AND READING potatoes /pəˈteɪtəʊz/ noun
bring back /brɪŋ ˈbæk/ phrasal verb salt and pepper /ˈsɒlt ən ˈpepə/ noun phrase
find out /faɪnd ˈaʊt/ phrasal verb steak /steɪk/ noun
give back /ɡɪv ˈbæk/ phrasal verb
pick up /pɪk ˈʌp/ verb phrase MAKE AND DO
put back /pʊt ˈbæk/ phrasal verb do the cleaning /ˈduː ðə ˈkliːnɪŋ/ collocation
put down /pʊt ˈdaʊn/ phrasal verb do the dishes /ˈduː ðə ˈdɪʃɪz/ collocation
take back /teɪk ˈbæk/ phrasal verb do the shopping /ˈduː ðə ˈʃɒpɪŋ/ collocation
take out /teɪk ˈaʊt/ phrasal verb do the washing /ˈduː ðə ˈwɒʃɪŋ/ collocation
do your homework /ˈduː jə ˈhəʊmwɜːk/ collocation
WORDS ABOUT BOOKS make a cake /ˈmeɪk ə ˈkeɪk/ collocation
author /ˈɔːθə/ noun make a cup of tea /ˈmeɪk ə ˈkʌp əv ˈtiː/ collocation
chapter /ˈtʃæptə/ noun make a mess /ˈmeɪk ə ˈmes/ collocation
cover /ˈkʌvə/ noun make a mistake /ˈmeɪk ə mɪˈsteɪk/ collocation
drawings /ˈdrɔːɪŋz/ noun make the bed /ˈmeɪk ðə ˈbed/ collocation
end /end/ noun
fan /fæn/ noun
opinion /əˈpɪnjən/ noun UNIT 20
pages /ˈpeɪdʒɪz/ noun
shelf /ʃelf/ noun CHANGE AS A VERB AND NOUN
title /ˈtaɪtl/ noun change [= alternative clothes] /tʃeɪndʒ/ noun
change [= become something different] /tʃeɪndʒ/ verb
change [= give money back when buying something]
UNIT 19 /tʃeɪndʒ/ verb
change [= something in a shop] /tʃeɪndʒ/ verb
WORDS TO DESCRIBE COOKING change [= something new] /tʃeɪndʒ/ noun
add /æd/ verb change [= transport] /tʃeɪndʒ/ verb
bake /beɪk/ verb change schools /ˈtʃeɪndʒ ˈskuːlz/ verb phrase
boil /bɔɪl/ verb
LIFE CHANGES
cover /ˈkʌvə/ verb
be ˈborn /biː bɔːn/ verb phrase
dry /draɪ/ verb
become a teenager /bɪˈkʌm ə ˈtiːnˌeɪdʒə/ verb phrase
fill /fɪl/ verb
find part-time work /faɪnd ˈpɑːt taɪm ˈwɜːk/ verb phrase
fried /fraɪd/ adjective
get married /ɡet ˈmærid/ verb phrase
grilled /ɡrɪld/ adjective
go to high school /ɡəʊ tə ˈhaɪ skuːl/ verb phrase
mix /mɪks/ verb
learn to walk and talk /lɜːn tə ˈwɔːk ən ˈtɔːk/ verb phrase
prepare /prɪˈpeə/ verb
move house /ˈmuːv ˈhaʊs/ verb phrase
roast /rəʊst/ adjective
start school /ˈstɑːt ˈskuːl/ verb phrase
INGREDIENTS start working or training /stɑːt ˈwɜːkɪŋ ɔ: ˈtreɪnɪŋ/
verb phrase
beans /biːnz/ noun
take exams /teɪk ɪɡˈzæmz/ verb phrase
carrots /ˈkærəts/ noun
travel /ˈtrævəl/ verb
130 VOCABULARY LIST

GR AMM AR REFERENCE AND PR ACTICE
PRESENT SIMPLE
UNIT 1 AND PRESENT CONTINUOUS 1 Complete the conversation with the
present simple or present continuous
form of the verb in brackets.
Present simple Sara: What (0) are you doing (do)?
We use the present simple to talk about things that are always Martina: I (1) (paint) a picture of
true or that happen regularly. We often use it with words like the trees.
often, usually, every day, twice a week, etc. Sara: But you (2) (not like) art!
I usually work hard. Martina: Yes, I know, but my friends
She learns English at school. (3) (play) football at the
Does he work here? No, he doesn’t. moment and I (4) (hate)
Do they often go to the cinema? Yes, they do. that.
Sara: What sports (5) you
Spelling: third person -s (enjoy) doing?
Martina: I (6) (go) swimming twice
Most verbs, add –s learns, works, lives, walks a week. What about you?
Sara: My best friend (7) (play)
verbs that end in -o, -s, -sh, goes, misses, watches,
hockey, but I (8) (prefer)
-ch, -x and -zz add -es boxes, buzzes
basketball.
verbs that end in consonant studies, carries Martina: I (9) (not do) anything
+ -y, remove the -y and add now. Let’s go for a walk.
-ies Sara: Good idea!
irregular verbs have → has
2 Write complete sentences in the present
simple or present continuous.
Present continuous 0 I / play tennis / at the moment.
We use the present continuous to talk about things that are I’m playing tennis at the moment.
happening now or at the moment. We often use it with words 1 My dad / usually go to work by car.
like now, at the moment, today, this week, etc.
I’m teaching my brother to swim at the moment. 2 We / learn how to play the guitar / today.
They’re playing tennis now.
You aren’t practising the piano much this week. 3 I / always watch TV / after dinner.
Are we getting fitter? Yes, we are.
4 My friends / not swim in the sea / now.
Spelling: -ing form
5 My cousin / not have breakfast /
every day.
Most verbs add -ing playing, going, learning
verbs ending in -e, remove live → living,
-e and add -ing make → making
verbs ending in -ie, change lie → lying
the -ie to -y and add -ing
one-syllable verbs ending sit → sitting,
in a vowel + a consonant swim → swimming
(except w, x or y), double
the consonant and add -ing
two-syllable verbs ending begin → beginning
in a stressed vowel + a (but open → opening)
consonant, double the
consonant and add -ing
In British English, we travel → travelling
double the final l in travel (American English:
travel → traveling)
GRAMMAR REFERENCE AND PRACTICE 131

VERBS WE DON’T USUALLY USE
UNIT 2 IN THE CONTINUOUS 2 Choose the correct words to complete the
sentences.
There are some verbs which we don’t normally use 0 Jack’s behind that tree. I can see / ’m seeing him.
in the present continuous: 1 I know / ’m knowing the names of all the rivers in
• Verbs of thinking: believe, understand, know, think, my country.
mean, hope. 2 My brother learns / ’s learning about the weather
Scientists believe the Earth is 4.6 billion years old. at the moment.
(not Scientists are believing …) 3 You need / ’re needing to do your homework
• Verbs of liking and not liking: like, hate, love, want, before Tuesday.
need, prefer. 4 You’re very quiet. What do you think / are you
I like those monkeys over there. (not I’m liking …) thinking about?
• Verbs of owning: own, belong, have. 5 My friends don’t play / aren’t playing football
That coat belongs to me. (not That coat’s today. It’s cold.
belonging …) 6 Can you say that again? We don’t understand /
• Verbs to describe sensations: see, feel, hear, smell, aren’t understanding.
taste. 7 Can you hear / Are you hearing that strange
The water feels very cold. noise?
However, we can use the present continuous to say
how someone looks or feels now. 3 Write complete sentences. Use the present simple
or the present continuous.
How do you feel today? I feel better.
or How are you feeling today? I’m feeling better. 0 Shh! I / think.
We often use can with these verbs. Shh! I’m thinking.
I can hear the sea from my bedroom. (not I’m 1 I / not understand / this exercise.
hearing)
• When think means ‘have an opinion’ about 2 My friends / think football is boring.
something, we do not use the continuous.
Scientists think there are about 1,000 wild pandas 3 What / you / do right now?
left. (not Scientists are thinking …)
However, when think means ‘consider’, we use the 4 We / not want to watch the film.
continuous.
I’m thinking of working in a zoo when I’m older. 5 That dog / belong to my cousin.

Practice
6 Penguins / not feel / the cold weather.
1 Complete the table with the verbs.
7 I / not like this book very much.
believe buy climb feel
hate like make mean
need own run sing
understand want work
Verbs we can use in Verbs we don’t

the continuous normally use in the
continuous
run need
132 GRAMMAR REFERENCE AND PRACTICE

UNIT 3 PAST SIMPLE 1 Complete the paragraph with the past
simple form of the verb in brackets.
Last summer, I (0) visited (visit) Moscow
Be with my family. We (1) (fly) from
London. On the first day, we (2)
Positive I / He / She / It was at home. (go) to the tourist information office and
You / We / They were at school. we (3) (ask) for information about
the city. My sister (4) (want) to
Negative I / He / She / It wasn’t at school.
go to the zoo. My dad (5) (not
You / We / They weren’t at home.
want) to go there, so he (6) (go)
Questions Was I / he / she / it at home? shopping. The next day, we (7)
Were you / we / they at school? (walk) to Red Square and we (8)
Short Yes, I / he / she / it was. (see) the Kremlin. We (9)
answers No, I / he / she / it wasn’t. (not go) inside the museum because it
Yes, you / we / they were. (10) (be) closed. We (11)
No, you / we / they weren’t. (have) a fantastic holiday there.
SUBJECT QUESTIONS
Regular and irregular verbs We normally use do or did in questions.
Where do you live?
What did you eat yesterday?
Positive I / You / He / She / It / We / They climbed …
However, we don’t use do or did if the question
I / You / He / She / It / We / They knew …
word (who, what, etc.) is the subject. Look at
Negative I / You / He / She / It / We / They didn’t want … these questions:
I / You / He / She / It / We / They didn’t write …
Questions Did I / you / he / she / it / we / they travel?
Did I / you / he / she / it / we / they fly? Subject: Who helped you? My mum helped me.
Short Yes, I / you / he / she / it / we / they did.
answers No, I / you / he / she / it /we / they didn’t. Object: Who did you help? I helped my sister.
• We use the past simple to talk about things that happened

or didn’t happen in the past. 2 Choose the correct words to complete
the questions.
Simon and I travelled by tram to the bus station.
We didn’t want my parents to drive us. 0 Who did lend / lent Fred money for the
coach?
Spelling: regular verbs 1 What did the boy see / saw the boy at
the cinema?
Most verbs add -ed play → played 2 What did happen / happened to you?
climb → climbed You’re late!
3 Who did eat / ate the cake?
verbs that end in -e, add -d decide → decided 4 Where did you go / went you on holiday?
arrive → arrived 5 Who did do / did their homework last
verbs that end in consonant + -y, carry → carried night?
change -y to -i and add -ed
one-syllable verbs ending in a vowel + stop → stopped
a consonant (except w, x or y), double
the consonant and add -ed
two-syllable verbs ending in a prefer → preferred
stressed vowel + consonant, double
the consonant and add -ed
In British English, we double the final l travel → travelled
in travel (America English:
travel → traveled)
FOR IRREGULAR VERBS SEE PAGE 149

PAST CONTINUOUS AND Practice
UNIT 4 PAST SIMPLE
1 Use the past continuous to write complete
sentences.
Past continuous
At 7.30 last night …
0 Mum / drive / her car into the garage.
Positive I / He / She / It was eating a Mum was driving her car into the garage.
sandwich. 1 it / rain.
You / We / They were standing on
the balcony. 2 Dad / cook / dinner.
Negative I / He / She / It wasn’t working in
the garden. 3 my brother and I / watch TV in the living room.
You / We / They weren’t reading a
book. 4 my sister / read.

Questions Was I / he / she / it building some
5 my grandparents / leave their apartment.
cupboards?

Were you / we / they painting the
gate?
sentences.
Short Yes, I / he / she / it was.
answers No, he / she / it wasn’t. 0 I was studying in my bedroom when I heard /
Yes, you / we / they were. was hearing a strange noise.
No, you / we / they weren’t. 1 While I was surfing, it started / was starting
to rain.
2 My friends played / were playing football in the
FOR THE SPELLING OF THE -ING FORM, classroom when the teacher came in.
SEE UNIT 1 PAGE 131 3 We walked to the park and then we had / were
having a game of football.
Past continuous and past simple 4 Ed rang me while I did / was doing my
homework.
We use the past continuous:
5 We packed / were packing our suitcases when
• to describe activities happening at a particular
the phone rang.
moment in the past. Sometimes, these activities
happen at the same time. We’re not interested
when the activities started or finished.
3 Complete the email with the past simple or past
continuous form of the verb in brackets.
Mum and Dad were cooking, my brother was playing
and I was doing my homework.
• after while to refer to a longer action or event that To: Mark Reply Forward
happened at the same time as another action. From: Tim

While Gary was painting the bedroom, Paula was
painting the living room. Hi, Mark!
We use the past simple: We (0) arrived (arrive) here in New York
• when one action follows another. yesterday. When we (1) (get up) this
I put on my coat and I left the house. Then, it started morning, the sun (2) (shine).
to rain.
• after when to refer to a shorter action or event It was a beautiful day, so we (3)
that happened in the middle of a longer one or (decide) to walk to Central Park. While we
interrupted it. (4) (sit) on the grass, I (5)
I was putting on my coat when it started to rain. (see) my teacher! She (6) (not be)
pleased to see me.
FOR THE PAST SIMPLE, SEE UNIT 3 PAGE 133
See you soon!
Tim

Practice
UNIT 5 COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE ADVERBS
1 Write the adverb, comparative and
superlative adverbs of the adjective.
Adjective Adverb Comparative Superlative 1 cheap, cheaply , ,
Regular 2 heavy, , ,
slow slowly more slowly the most slowly 3 fast, , ,
easy easily more easily the most easily 4 bad, , ,
simple simply more simply the most simply 5 serious, , ,
beautiful beautifully more the most 6 wonderful, , ,
beautifully beautifully
Irregular 2 Complete the sentences with the
comparative or superlative form of the
good well better the best adverb in brackets.
fast fast faster the fastest
hard hard harder the hardest 0 Natalie ran the fastest (fast), so she won
the race.
late late later the latest
1 Laura won the competition because she
danced (beautiful).
We use adjectives to describe a noun and adverbs to 2 I watch films (often) than
describe a verb. sports programmes.
• We form most adverbs by adding -ly to the adjective. 3 My sister plays the guitar (well)
bad → badly, careful → carefully, easy → easily than me.
• Some adverbs do not end in -ly. 4 Matt’s mum helped him, so he finished
good → well, fast → fast, hard → hard, late → late the homework (easily) than us.
We use comparative adverbs to compare two things. 5 Luke’s teacher was happy with him
My brother talks more quickly than me. because he did the exercise
• We use more with adjectives that finish in -ly. (quickly).
Jack did the exam more carefully than Nick.
• The opposite of more is less. 3 Complete the sentences with as + adverb
+ as.
Nick did the exam less carefully than Jack.
• We add -er to fast, hard and late. 0 We all finished the exam quickly. I
Peter swims faster than Mike. Jim arrived later than me. finished the exam as quickly as my
• The comparative form of the adverb well is better. friends.
My sister speaks French better than my mum. 1 I arrived home late, but my brother
• The comparative form of the adverb badly is worse. arrived home later. I didn’t arrive home
I did much worse in my exam than Theo. my brother.
2 My best friend speaks more quietly
• We can also use often to compare things.
than me. I don’t speak my best
I play tennis more often than basketball.
friend.
• We can also use (not) as + adverb + as to compare things. 3 My parents eat very slowly. My dad eats
Oliver talks as loudly as Phil. (= They both talk loudly.) my mum.
Jane doesn’t write as quickly as Paula. (= Paula writes more 4 William watches TV more often than his
quickly than Jane.) sister. William’s sister doesn’t watch TV
We use superlative adverbs to compare one thing with two William.
or more other things. 5 My cousin is the best guitar player in my
My dad walks the most slowly in our family. school. Nobody plays it him.
• We use most with adverbs that finish in -ly.
Of all our teachers, our maths teacher speaks the most
quickly.
• The opposite of most is least.
Kevin did his exam the least carefully.
• We add -est to fast, hard and late.
Jason ran the fastest, so he won the race.
• The superlative form of the adverb well is the best.
My grandma cooks the best in my house.
• The superlative form of the adverb badly is the worst.
None of the teams played very well, but our team played
the worst.
• We can also use often to compare things.
When I was young, I played football the most often.

UNIT 6 POSSESSION 1 Rewrite the sentences with the apostrophe (’).

0 The dogs bowl is empty.
The dog’s bowl is empty.
’s (apostrophe + s ) 1 Terrys gold coins are on the table.
• We use ’s (apostrophe + s) for people and animals.
That’s my brother’s hat. (not the hat of my brother) 2 The childrens shoes are near the door.
Where’s the cat’s bowl? (not the bowl of the cat)
• With singular nouns, we use ’s. 3 Both boys lunches are in the kitchen.
my mum’s necklace, my teacher’s ring
• With plural nouns, we put the apostrophe (’) at the 4 I can’t find my sisters necklace. She’ll be angry.
end of the plural noun.
my friends’ shoes (not the shoes of my friends) 5 My cousins names are Ana and Eva.
my cousins’ jackets (not the jackets of my cousins)
• If the plural noun does not end in -s (e.g. children,
men, women, people), we use ’s. 2 Choose the correct words to complete the
sentences.
The children’s bedroom is over there.
0 That isn’t Ben’s book. He / His / Him is on the
Determiners and pronouns teacher’s desk.
1 Nora saw Sue at the cinema. She’s a friend of
Determiners Pronouns she / her / hers.
2 We don’t live here. We / Our / Ours house is near
my mine
the park.
your yours 3 I’ve got two cats. They / Their / Theirs names are
his his Leo and Tiger.
4 Who does this jumper belong to? Is it you /
her hers
your / yours?
our ours 5 I was shopping when I saw a classmate of me /
their theirs my / mine.
• We use pronouns instead of determiner + noun. 3 Complete the second sentence with the correct
pronoun.
Is that my pencil on your desk? No, yours is over
there. (= your pencil) 0 I saw one of my friends yesterday.
Is this your jacket? No, it’s hers. (= her jacket) I saw a friend of mine yesterday.
Who do these books belong to? They’re ours. 1 Jane went on holiday with one of her friends.
(= our books) Jane went on holiday with a friend of .
• We can use ‘a friend of mine/yours/his, etc.’ instead 2 We played football with one of our neighbours.
of ‘one of my/your/his, etc. friends’. We played football with a neighbour of .
This ball belongs to a friend of mine. He lent it to me. 3 My sister borrowed one of my necklaces.
(not a friend of me) My sister borrowed a necklace of .
Neil finished his homework. A classmate of his 4 My parents had dinner with some of their
helped him. (not a classmate of him) friends.
My parents had dinner with some friends of
.
5 I found some money in one of your shoes.
I found some money in a shoe of .

Vicky: W
ould you like to come to my house
UNIT 7 PRESENT CONTINUOUS FOR FUTURE after school today?
Sara: I can’t,
(0) I’m helping Max with his homework.
FOR THE PRESENT CONTINUOUS, SEE UNIT 1 PAGE 131 Vicky: How about Friday afternoon?
Sara: No, (1) .
• We often use the present continuous to talk about things Vicky: Are you free on Saturday?
that are happening now or at this moment (see Unit 1). Sara: It’s my dad’s birthday and we
Tim’s in the park. He’s climbing a tree. (2) .
• We can also use the present continuous to talk about our Vicky: And on Sunday?
future plans and arrangements. Sara: In the morning, (3) .
I’m meeting Julie later. We’re playing tennis. Vicky: What about the afternoon?
• When we use the present continuous for the future, we Sara: Oh no, I can’t! (4) .
usually use a future time expression (later, on Monday We’ve got a maths test on Monday!
morning, at 6 pm tomorrow, etc.) to show we’re talking
about the future and not now.
We’re learning how to ski. (= now, at this moment)
3 What are you doing at these times this
week? Complete these sentences so they are
We’re learning how to ski next weekend. (= future true for you.
arrangement)
0 (after school)
1 Complete these sentences with the present continuous
form of the verb in brackets. Then, read the sentences
I’m doing my homework after school.
1 (tomorrow morning)
again. Are we talking about now or the future? Write N
(now) or F (future).
2 (Friday afternoon)
0 My friends are hiking (hike) in the mountains. N
1 We (go paddle boarding) with Mia and Alfie on
Friday. 3 (Saturday morning)
2 you (listen) to me?
3 My dad (not come) with us on holiday next 4 (on Sunday)
week.
4 Be quiet! I (do) my homework.
5 How you and your friends (get) to football 5 (next week)
practice later?
2 Sara is talking to Vicky. Look at Sara’s diary and complete

their conversation.
DIARY
Thursday: am
pm help Max with homework
Friday: am
pm go to dentist
Saturday: am Dad’s birthday, have pizza at Paolo’s
Pizzas
pm
Sunday: am play basketball
pm study
Monday: am maths test!
pm

UNIT 8 FUTURE WITH WILL FUTURE WITH MAY / MIGHT
Positive I / You / He / She / It / We / They’ll Positive I / You / He / She / It / We / They

(will) be very different in the future. may / might book the hotel today.
Negative I / You / He / She / It / We / They won’t Negative I / You / He / She / It / We / They may
(will not) live in big houses. not / might not ring you later.
Questions Will I / you / he / she / it / we / they
drive cars? • We use may and might to talk about future
possibilities.
Short Yes, I / you / he / she / it / we /
It may rain tomorrow. (= I’m not sure.)
answers they will.
We might go for a walk later. (= We aren’t certain.)
No, I / you / he / she / it / we / they
• When we talk about future possibilities, may and
won’t (will not).
might have the same meaning.
I may / might buy some new trainers tomorrow. Mine
• We use will to talk about things which we think are are very old.
certain to happen in the future. Jack’s feeling ill. He may not / might not go to school
Everyone will live in big cities in the future. tomorrow.
We won’t live in small towns. • We don’t often use may or might to ask questions
• We often use expressions like I think, I hope, I’m sure about future possibilities. We usually use will.
or certain with will. What will you take on the school trip?
I think I’ll work in a big bank. I may take my sun hat and I might take
I’m sure my friends won’t live in the same town. my sunglasses.
1 Complete the predictions with will or won’t.

0 We / live / to be 120 years old. sentences.
We’ll live to be 120 years old. 1 I’m sure I’ll / may go swimming. It’s really hot.
1 I / have / a big house and a fast car. 2 We’ll / may have pizza or we’ll / may have a
hamburger. We haven’t decided yet.
2 My friends / move away. 3 My mum’ll / might be able to drive us to the
concert, but she isn’t sure.
3 My cousin / become / a famous film star. 4 Don’t worry. I’m certain they won’t / may not be
late. They left 45 minutes ago.
4 There / be / cities on other planets. 5 Where will / may you go on holiday? We may go
to South Africa.
5 We / not buy / things in shops.
2 Write complete sentences with may or might and
one of the verbs in the box.
2 Complete the questions with will and the verb in
brackets, and then write your own answers. buy go not go not rain
0 Where will people build (build) houses in turn off not understand
the future?
I think they will build houses under the sea. 0 I don’t know what we’re doing this evening.
1 students (go) to school in the We might go to Molly’s barbecue party.
future? 1 I haven’t got any sun cream.
I’m sure . I to the beach.
2 Where we (buy) clothes and 2 I’m really cold.
shoes in the future? I the air conditioning.
I think . 3 Look! The clouds are moving.
3 How people (travel) from one It later.
place to another? 4 It’s my cousin’s birthday. Her parents
I’m certain . her a new smartphone.
4 there (be) more wars? 5 You this teacher because she talks
I hope . very fast.
5 scientists (discover) new things?
I’m sure .

MUST, MUST NOT (MUSTN’T), HAVE TO,
UNIT 9 DON’T HAVE TO 2 Complete the sentences and questions
with the correct form of have to and the
verb in brackets.
must / mustn’t 0 Do you have to join (join) a club
to play this sport?
Positive I / You / He / She / It / We / They must go. 1 Today’s Saturday. I (not go) to
bed early.
Negative I / You / He / She / It / We / They mustn’t go. 2 My mum (work) in London this
week.
• We use must and mustn’t to talk about rules and 3 What time your sister
obligations. (come) home when she goes out?
You must switch off your mobile phone in class. 4 My uncle has got problems with his
You mustn’t eat or drink in the classroom. back.
• We don’t often use must in the question form. We prefer to He (go) swimming every day.
use Do (I, you, etc.) have to … ? 5 We (not watch) the film, we can
Do I have to wear a swimming hat? play a game instead.
Practice must and have to

• Must and have to are similar.
1 Write complete sentences with must or mustn’t.
I’ve got a test tomorrow. I must study. or I
0 ✗ you / walk on the grass have to study.
You mustn’t walk on the grass. • Mustn’t and don’t have to are different.
1 ✓they / fill in the form You mustn’t be late for class. (= you can’t
be late. It’s the rule.)
You don’t have to bring your own
2 ✗ we / forget Mum’s birthday equipment. (= it isn’t necessary but you
can if you want.)
3 ✗ my cousin / wear large earrings to school • In the past, we use had to for must and
have to.
I didn’t watch the film because I had to study.
4 ✓you / practise for an hour every day • The past of don’t have to and do you have
to is didn’t have to and did you have to.
5 ✓you / be careful Did you have to stay at school late
yesterday? No, I didn’t.
My mum didn’t have to go to work this
morning, so she drove me to school.
have to / don’t have to
sentences.
Positive I / You / We / They have to go.
He / She / It / has to go. 0 You don’t have to / mustn’t help me but
Negative I / You / We / They don’t (do not) have to go. you can if you want.
He / She / It doesn’t (does not) have to go. 1 When I was younger, I had to / must go
to bed at 8 pm.
Questions Do I / you / we / they have to go?
2 No ball games, please! You don’t have to
Does he / she / it have to go?
/ mustn’t play football here.
Short Yes, I / you / we / they do. 3 Do you have to / Must you leave now? It’s
answers Yes, he / she / it does. very early.
No, I / you / we / they don’t. 4 I don’t have to / mustn’t wear a
No, he / she / it doesn’t. swimming cap at my pool, but I usually
wear one.
• We use have to to say something is necessary and don’t 5 Shh! My sister’s sleeping! We don’t have
have to to say something isn’t necessary. to / mustn’t wake her.
You have to bring sandwiches. (= you need to bring)
but You don’t have to bring a drink. (= you don’t need
to bring)

VERB PATTERNS – GERUNDS
UNIT 10 AND INFINITIVES 2 Complete the sentences with the correct form
of the verbs in the box.
• When we use two verbs together in a sentence,
the second verb is usually a gerund (sleeping, do fail
join
make
swimming, etc.) or an infinitive (to sleep, to swim). play upload
I want to meet my new neighbours.
I don’t mind helping close friends. 0 I’ve found a new app for doing homework .
• We use an infinitive after some verbs. 1 I’m interested in new friends.
We hope to see you soon. 2 My brother is very good at the guitar.
He’s learning to play the guitar. 3 Don’t worry about the exam. It’s easy!
• We use a gerund after other verbs. 4 My mum’s getting better at photos onto
He finished doing his homework and watched TV. her blog.
My dad enjoys playing chess. 5 I’m thinking of a computer club.
• We can use a gerund or an infinitive after these
verbs: start, begin, prefer, like, love. 3 Complete the sentences with a verb in the gerund
or infinitive form so they are true for you.
We went to the beach, but then it started raining.
or … it started to rain. 0 My friends and I are interested in
My friends began playing that game two hours ago. sharing photos and stories .
or My friends began to play … 1 When I leave school, I hope .
• We also use a gerund after prepositions (at, in, 2 I don’t mind , but I don’t like .
for, etc.). 3 I started when I was younger.
Thank you for inviting me to your party. 4 I prefer to .
I’m thinking of buying a new bike. 5 I’m thinking of next weekend.
verb + gerund finish, don’t mind,

enjoy, miss
verb + infinitive decide, choose, learn,
help, hope, plan, want,
need
verb + gerund or verb start, begin, prefer, like,
+ infinitive love
• We can use a gerund as the subject of a verb.

Joining the film club was a really good idea.
1 Complete the sentences with the infinitive or

gerund form of the verb in brackets.
0 I need to buy (buy) some new trainers.
1 I missed (see) you at the party.
2 My brother decided (study) maths at
university.
3 I don’t mind (get up) early at the
weekend.
4 (make) friends isn’t always easy.
5 My friends enjoy (write) their blogs.
6 We finished (download) the film and
then we watched it.

another / other
UNIT 11 DETERMINERS
• We use another with a singular noun to talk about
‘one other’ person or thing. We write it as one word.
a/an / the This café is closed. There’s another one over there.
• We use other with plural nouns and uncountable
We use a or an when we introduce something for
nouns to talk about people or things in general
the first time and when we talk about things in
which are different from the ones we are talking
general.
about.
I visited a museum in Paris.
We wanted to see the palace and the cathedral,
I bought an ice cream and a can of lemonade.
but my sister wanted to visit other places.
We use the:
(not another places)
• when we talk about something already mentioned.
Were there other people there?
I visited a museum in Paris. The museum was
• We use the other with singular or plural nouns to
very old.
talk about one or more things already mentioned.
• before superlatives.
We didn’t eat in the other restaurant. (= We know
London is the biggest city in England.
there are only two restaurants.)
• before first, second, etc.
The other famous places to visit are all in the old
The first man to walk on the moon was Neil
town. (= We are talking about a list of famous
Armstrong.
places.)
• when there is only one of something.
I went to the sea to swim. (There’s only one near.)
2 Choose the correct word to complete the
sentences.
1 Complete the conversation with a/an or the.
1 This pencil is broken. Can I have another / other
Matt: Where did you go on holiday?
one?
Jane: We went to St Malo. It’s (1) town
2 All / Both my parents work in the city centre.
in France.
3 My friends want to write about their last holiday,
Matt: Did you have a good time?
but I’ve got another / other idea.
Jane: Yes, we went to (2) beach every
4 They built a new bridge because another / the
day and we swam in (3) sea. In
other bridge is very old.
the evening, we ate in (4) very
5 My dad’s got five brothers and sisters. They all /
good restaurant near our hotel.
both live near us.
Matt: What was the name of (5)
6 I’d like to study all / both maths and science
restaurant?
when I go to university.
Jane: I can’t remember. I bought you (6)
T-shirt. It was (7)
shop.
nicest one in the
3 Complete the sentences with the words in
the box.
Matt: Thank you, Jane. You’re (8) first
person to buy me a present from their all an another
both
holiday. other the
both / all 1 The website didn’t give me much information, so
• We use both to talk about two things. I had to look at websites.
Both Rachel and Ruth enjoy going to the theatre. 2 I don’t know what to get Sam for his birthday.
(not The both Rachel and Ruth …) Can you give me idea?
• We use all to talk about a total number of people or 3 the cheaper hotels were full, so we
things. stayed in a really expensive one.
We visited all the museums in the city. 4 She’s lost her map, so she’ll need to buy
one.
5 We didn’t spend much time in art
gallery because there were a lot of people inside.
6 ‘Do you prefer the green or the blue scarf?’
‘I think scarves are nice.’

UNIT 12 RELATIVE PRONOUNS WHO, WHICH, THAT

• We use who, which and that with a short sentence (or clause) to give
more information about people or things.
An actor is a person who plays a part in a film or play.
A thriller is a type of film which is very exciting.
• We use who with people.
A fan is a person who loves watching, reading or listening to something.
• We use which with things.
Horror is a type of film which is too frightening for young children.
• We can use that for people or things.
My sister is someone that loves all science fiction stories.
3D films are films that make everything on screen seem more real.
1 Complete the sentences with who or which.

1 There are now cinemas are more like hotels.
2 A guest is a person visits your house.
3 A fim star is someone is a very successful and famous film
actor.
4 A park is a place often has lakes, woods and gardens.
5 This is a website tells you how good films are.
6 It’s best to go to the cinema with a friend likes the same
type of films as you.
2 Use who, that or which to make one sentence.

0 A singer was singing. He was very good.
The singer who was singing was very good.
1 A film festival is here in summer. It is good fun.
The film festival is good fun.
2 A friend went to see a musical. He had a good time.
The friend had a good time.
3 There’s a shop near my house. It sells jazz CDs.
There’s a shop near my house .
4 We went to a cinema. It had 12 screens.
We went to a cinema .
5 A neighbour likes watching drama films. She acts as a hobby.
The neighbour acts as a hobby.
3 Match the two halves of the sentences and add who or which.
1 I know a person a only watch musicals.
2 There’s a new film b looks very easy, but isn’t.
3 Acting is a job c has met Steven Spielberg.
4 We’ve got two friends d has beds instead of seats.
5 I’d love to see that cinema e I really want to see.
1
2
3
4
5

PRESENT PERFECT WITH Practice
UNIT 13 EVER AND NEVER
1 Write the past participle.
Present perfect 1 arrive 7 break

2 enjoy 8 buy
3 repair 9 fall
Positive I / You / We / They’ve (have) talked. 4 stop 10 grow
He / She / It’s (has) decided. 5 travel 11 lend
Negative I / You / We / They haven’t (have 6 walk 12 wear
not) gone.
He / She / It hasn’t (has not) taken. 2 Complete the sentences with the present perfect
with never and these verbs.
Questions Have I / you / we / they painted?
Has he / she / it worked? explore grow kayak
Short Yes, I / you / we / they have. learn
meet pick
answers No, I / you / we / they haven’t.
Yes, he / she / it has. 0 I have never picked wild fruit.
No, he / she / it hasn’t. 1 We down a river.
2 My parents have got a big garden, but they
vegetables there.
• We can use the present perfect to talk about our
3 My friends a famous person.
experiences before now.
4 My grandma to speak English.
I’ve tried rock climbing.
5 I a cave.
• We use have/has + past participle.
My sister hasn’t slept in a tent.
• With regular verbs, we write the past participle
3 Write complete questions in the present perfect
with ever. Then write the short answer.
in the same way as regular past simple verbs.
(For spelling, see Grammar reference and practice 0 you / swim / in a cold lake?
Unit 3.) Have you ever swum in a cold lake?
My mum has worked for a famous magazine. Yes, I have.
• With irregular verbs, the past participle does not 1 your brother / write / a blog?
end in -ed. No,
I have spoken to a film star. 2 your friends / ride / a horse?
• We sometimes use ever with present perfect Yes,
questions to say ‘in your life’. 3 your teacher / forget / your name?
Have you ever climbed a tree? Yes,
• We sometimes use never with present perfect 4 you / sell / things you don’t want?
statements to say ‘not ever in my life’. No,
My grandparents have never flown in a plane. 5 you and your friends / win / a competition?
• We don’t use past time expressions like yesterday, No,
last weekend, two days ago, etc. with the present
perfect. We use them with the past simple.
I played tennis yesterday. (not I’ve played tennis
yesterday.)
FOR PAST PARTICIPLES, SEE PAGE 151

PRESENT PERFECT WITH JUST,
UNIT 14 YET AND ALREADY 2 Choose the correct words to complete the
sentences.
FOR THE PRESENT PERFECT, SEE UNIT 13 1 Can you lend me a pencil? I’ve just / yet broken
PAGE 143 mine.
2 We’re having a lovely time in Paris. We’ve already
• We can use the present perfect with just, yet and / yet seen the Eiffel Tower and the Louvre
already. museum.
I’ve just bought a new pair of shoes. Do you like 3 It’s Grandad’s birthday. Have you phoned him yet
them? / just?
I’m full. I’ve already eaten five slices of pizza. 4 Wait a moment! We haven’t finished yet /
Have you seen that film yet? already.
No, I haven’t seen it yet, but I’m going to see it 5 Dad’s just / yet phoned. He’s going to be late.
tomorrow. 6 I’ve already / yet tidied my room. I’m not going
• We use the present perfect with just to say that to do it again.
something happened a very short time ago. Just
goes between have and the past participle. 3 Read the situations and write questions or
sentences in the present perfect with just, yet or
Would you like something to eat? No, thanks. I’ve
just eaten. (= I ate something a very short time ago.) already and the verbs in brackets.
• We use the present perfect with already to say that 0 Your friend fell and hurt her leg two minutes ago.
something happened before now, often sooner What does she say?
than we expected. We often use already in the I can’t move. I have just hurt my leg. (hurt)
positive. It usually goes between have and the past 1 You are in New York. You visited the Empire State
participle. Building yesterday, but you’d like to see the
Mum: You should do your homework. Statue of Liberty. What do you say?
Son: I’ve already done it. (= The son has done his I (not/see)
homework sooner than his mum expected.) 2 A friend comes to your house and you are going
• We use the present perfect with yet to ask or to have lunch. What do you ask?
talk about time until now. We often expect you ?
that something might happen in the future. We (have lunch)
often use yet at the end of questions or negative 3 A friend lends you a book, but you read it last
sentences. month. What do you say?
Dave: Have you been to the new café yet? I (read)
Sue: No, I haven’t been yet. (= Sue might go to 4 Your mum asks you to buy some bread from the
the café in the future.) bakery, but you did it earlier. What do you say?
(buy)
1 Rewrite the sentences with the word in brackets.
5 Your friends are choosing a film to watch.
0 The new sports shop hasn’t opened. (yet) What do you ask them?
The new sports shop hasn’t opened yet. you ? (choose)
1 I’ve seen my best friend outside the library. (just)

2 Let’s see a different film. I’ve seen that one.
(already)

3 I’m hungry. I haven’t eaten. (yet)

4 Rob can’t play football. He’s broken his foot.
(just)

5 Have your friends arrived? (yet)


UNIT 15 PRESENT PERFECT WITH SINCE AND FOR 3 Write complete sentences with the
present perfect and for or since so they are
true for you.
FOR THE PRESENT PERFECT, SEE UNIT 13 PAGE 143 0 I / not play computer games
I haven’t played computer games since
• We can use the present perfect to talk about an action or yesterday.
situation which started in the past and continues in the 1 We / not have maths
present. We use since and for to say how long something has
been happening. 2 my best friend / live in his or her house
We’ve lived in this house since March.
We’ve lived in this house for four months. 3 my mum / not cook a meal
• We use since with the time when the action or situation
started. 4 my friends / know each other
I’ve had this computer since 2013, January, my birthday, etc.
• We use for with an amount of time, such as the number of 5 I / not eat anything
hours, months, years, etc.
My dad’s worked in that bank for eight weeks, six months, two
years, etc.
• We usually use how long with the present perfect to ask
4 Write complete questions with How
long …? and the present perfect. Then,
questions. write your own answers with the present
How long have you had your dog? perfect and for or since.
We’ve had it since last year / for 11 months.
0 you / know / your best friend?
1 Complete the table with the time expressions in the box. How long have you known your best
friend?
10 o’clock 10 seconds 13th April, 2011 I’ve known him for four years.
ges
a breakfast ever five days 1 your parents / live / here?
four months
I was young May
my birthday three minutes Tuesday
two hours two weeks a year years 2 your best friend / have / his or her school
bag?

Since For
3 you / study / in this school?
10 o’clock, 10 seconds,

4 your favourite shop / be / open?

5 your English teacher / work / in your
2 Complete the sentences with the present perfect form of
the verbs in brackets and for or since.
school?

0 My neighbours have lived (live) in their house for

five years.
1 My aunt (have) her cat 2007.
2 My brother (not eat) meat a long time.
3 I (like) playing tennis I was young.
4 We (not see) our cousins months.
5 My mum and dad (be) married 1996.

PRESENT PERFECT AND

UNIT 16 PAST SIMPLE 1 Complete the table with these time expressions.
already ever
for 18 weeks in 2008
FOR THE PAST SIMPLE, SEE UNIT 3 just last week
never recently
PAGE 143 since 5th May three days ago
when I was younger yesterday yet
FOR THE PRESENT PERFECT, SEE UNITS 13,

14 AND 15 PAGES 143–145
Present perfect Past simple
We use the present perfect: just yesterday
• to talk about an action that finished in the
past, but the result is important now. We are
not interested in when the action happened.
My brother’s happy because he has won a
competition.
We can also use the present perfect:
• with ever and never to talk about our 2 Complete the sentences with the present perfect or
past simple form of the verb in brackets.
experiences until now.
I’ve never learned French. (= until now, but 1 I (buy) this bag when I was on holiday.
I may learn it in the future) 2 I (not be) ill for a long time.
• with just, already and yet to talk about things 3 My best friend was late for school this morning
we have or haven’t done recently. because she (miss) the bus.
We’ve just finished eating. I haven’t read that 4 We (send) an email to our teacher three days
book yet. ago, but she (not answer) yet.
• to talk about an action or situation which 5 My mum and dad (know) each other since
started in the past and continues into the they were children. They (go) to school
present. We use for and since to say how long together.
it has been happening. 6 You (make) a lot of mistakes! Please write
How long have you lived here? this story again.
I’ve lived here since 2005.
•
We use the past simple:
to talk about an action that happened in the
3 Write complete questions with How long … ? and the
present perfect. Then, write your own answer with the
past. present perfect.
My brother won a competition. 0 How long / live here?
• when we are interested in when the action How long have you lived here?
happened. I’ve lived here for six years.
My brother won the competition last week.
We can also use the past simple: 1 How long / know your English teacher?
• to talk about experiences which happened
over a time in the past.
When my dad lived in France for a month, he 2 How long / like your favourite band?
didn’t learn French. (= this time is finished. My
dad doesn’t live in France now.)
Remember, when we ask questions about a
time in the past, we use When …?
When did you learn to ride a bike?
4 Now, write complete questions with When … ? Then,
write your own answer with the past simple.
I learned to ride a bike when I was five years old.
0 When / start learning English?
When did you start learning English?
I started learning English four years ago.
1 When / learn to swim?

2 When / use a computer for the first time?


UNIT 17 REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS 3 Complete the conversation with the
correct reflexive pronouns. Add by if
necessary.
FOR DETERMINERS AND PRONOUNS, SEE UNIT 6 PAGE 136 Lara: Hi, Rosa. What are you doing
standing there (0) by yourself?
Rosa: I can’t get into my house. I just
I myself it itself came out for a minute and the
you yourself we ourselves door closed (1) !
Lara: Oh, have you knocked on the
he himself you yourselves door?
she herself them themselves Rosa: There’s nobody in at the moment.
I was (2) .
• We use -self when the subject and the object of the verb are Lara: Well, come in and wait in our
the same person. house. We can have a chat
I hurt myself when I was playing football. (not I hurt me.) and a sandwich and enjoy
My friends enjoyed themselves at my party. (not My friends (3) ! Oh, sorry.
enjoyed them.) I’ve just remembered. Callum
• We can use by + myself, yourself, etc. to mean ‘alone’ or and Ed made (4) lots of
‘without any help’. sandwiches earlier, so there isn’t
I usually walk to school by myself. (= nobody walks with me) any bread left.
They did their homework by themselves.(= nobody helped Rosa: Really? They made sandwiches
them) (5) ? They usually ask
your mum or dad to do it for
1 Complete these sentences with myself, yourself, herself,
himself, ourselves, yourselves, themselves. Lara:
them!
I know. By the way, if you want to
ring your mum, there’s the phone.
1 My brother hurt while he was climbing a tree.
Rosa: Oh, can I? Thanks.
2 I’ve just cut with this knife.
Lara: No problem. Help (6) !
3 Is it safe for those children to go swimming by ?
4 Do you and your friends need help or can you clean the
kitchen by ?
5 If you’re hungry, make a sandwich!
6 We really enjoyed at the party.
2 Read the sentences and complete with by if you think you

need to. If not, don’t write anything.
0 When Mum broke her ankle, she couldn’t drive
herself to the station, so Dad took her.
1 I waited for 40 minutes myself.
2 Please help yourself!
3 Alexa didn’t have any brothers or sisters, so she was used
to being herself.
4 The children are too young to go out
themselves.
5 Ben always covers himself in sun cream when
he goes out in the sun.
6 I really hope we enjoy ourselves.

UNIT 18 FIRST CONDITIONAL 2 Complete these sentences with the correct form
of the verb in brackets.
1 We (go) skiing if it (snow) this
If + present simple, will / won’t + infinitive weekend.
2 If you (not be) careful, you
If you study a lot, you will pass the exam.
(fall).
3 He (get) ill if he (not stop)
will / won’t + infinitive if + present simple eating fast food.
4 If my friends (not leave) now, they
You will pass the exam if you study a lot.
(not catch) the train.
5 We (not stay) at home if the weather
• We use the first conditional to talk about things (be) nice on Saturday.
that will or won’t happen in a situation. 6 If Dad (not come) soon, he
If you talk about the problem (situation), you’ll feel (miss) dinner.
better (result).
If he isn’t careful (situation), he’ll hurt himself 3 Read the questions and write answers that are
true for you.
(result).
• We can use a negative verb in the if clause and the 1 What will your parents say if you’re late home
will clause. today?
If you don’t finish the book, you won’t know how the If I’m late home,
story ends. 2 What will you wear tomorrow if it’s cold?
• When the sentence begins with If we use a comma.
When we use if in the middle of the sentence, we 3 How will you feel if you pass all your exams?
don’t use a comma.
If you get to the shop before 10 am, you’ll get a free 4 What will you buy if you go shopping on
book. Saturday?
You’ll get a free book if you get to the shop before
10 am. 5 Will you cook dinner if you get home before your
parents tonight?
1 Choose the correct verb to complete the
sentences.
6 Will you watch TV if you finish all your
1 If you write to the author, she send / ’ll send a homework?
nice reply.
2 You’ll be late if you won’t / don’t hurry up.
3 Sam doesn’t / won’t find out about his surprise
party if we don’t tell him.
4 If you won’t / don’t like the book, we’ll give you
another one.
5 We won’t have a picnic if Leo doesn’t / won’t
want one.

UNIT 19 PRESENT SIMPLE PASSIVE 2 Complete the sentences with the present passive
form of the verbs in brackets.
1 My best friend (call) Jon. It’s short for
Present simple be + past participle Jonathan.
2 Thousands of films (download) every
I’m (am) / ’m (am) not given homework every
day.
day.
3 Walking boots (not need) for the school
You / We / They ’re taken to school by car. trip.
(are) / aren’t (are not) 4 I (give) money for my birthday by my
He / She / It ’s (is) / taught by Mrs parents.
isn’t (is not) Kingston. 5 In my school, uniforms (not wear).
6 Cakes (bake) in the oven.
• We use the passive to talk about what happens to
something or someone.
3 Rewrite the sentences in the present passive.
Cereal is often covered in sugar or chocolate. 0 Someone cleans our classroom every day.
Packets of cereal are sold all over the world. Our classroom is cleaned every day.
• We often don’t know, or we aren’t interested in, 1 People speak English all over the world.
who or what does the action. English all over the world.
The grain is taken to the factory. (We aren’t 2 We don’t use the computers in our classroom.
interested in who takes the grain.) The computers in our classroom .
The cereal is eaten for breakfast. (We aren’t 3 They don’t cook the food in our school.
interested in who eats the cereal.) The food in our school.
• We can use by if we think it is important to say who 4 My friends send me a lot of messages.
does the action. A lot of messages my friends.
We are taught maths by Mr Green. (= Mr Green 5 They don’t grow bananas in England.
teaches us maths.) Bananas in England.
The grain is mixed by a special machine. (= A special 6 Special machines make the food into different
machine mixes the grain.) shapes.
The food special machines.
FOR PAST PARTICIPLES, SEE UNIT 13 PAGE 143
AND THE IRREGULAR VERB LIST PAGE 151

sentences.
1 Bread is sold / are sold in that shop.
2 We is given / are given a lot of homework on
Fridays.
3 My bag isn’t made / aren’t made of leather.
4 The World Cup is watched / are watched all over
the world.
5 I’m not paid / isn’t paid to help at home.
6 My friends isn’t invited / aren’t invited to the
party.

UNIT 20 PAST SIMPLE PASSIVE 2 Choose the correct words to complete the
sentences.
1 Our school is built / was built in 2005.
Past simple be + past participle 2 I am driven / was driven to school because my
dad’s a teacher there.
I / He / She / It was / given a special award.
3 My mum’s mobile is stolen / was stolen yesterday.
wasn’t (was not)
4 London is visited / was visited by millions of
You / We / They were / taken to see a castle. people every year.
weren’t (were not) 5 These sandwiches are made / were made last
night.
• We use the past passive to talk about what 6 That book is written / was written many
happened to something or someone. years ago.
This museum was built 150 years ago.
Animals were kept in that building. 3 Read the questions and write answers that are
true for you.
Was St Paul’s Cathedral built by Christopher Wren?
0 What’s your best friend called?
FOR THE PRESENT PASSIVE, SEE UNIT 19 My best friend is called Nick.
PAGE 149 1 When were you born?

FOR PAST PARTICIPLES, SEE UNIT 13 PAGE 143 2 What were you given for your last birthday?
AND THE IRREGULAR VERB LIST, SEE PAGE 151
3 What fruit is grown in your country?
1 Write complete sentences in the past passive.
Remember to use by if you say who did the action.

4 When was your house built?

0 This castle / build / a prince 5 How much homework are you given?
This castle was built by a prince.
1 This photo / take / my sister. 6 How old were you when were you were first
taught how to read?
2 The cakes / eat / my friends.

3 The Summer Palace / make / into a public park /
in 1924.

4 We / not invite / to Megan’s party last week.

5 We / show / around the library / the tour guide.

6 You / not give / a present / your brother.


LIST OF IRREGULAR VERBS
Infinitive Past simple Past participle Infinitive Past simple Past participle
be was were been lend lent lent
become became become lie lay lain
begin began begun lose lost lost
break broke broken make made made
bring brought brought mean meant meant
build built built meet met met
burn burnt/burned burnt/burned pay paid paid
buy bought bought put put put
catch caught caught read read read
choose chose chosen ride rode ridden
come came come ring rang rung
cost cost cost run ran run
cut cut cut say said said
do did done see saw seen
draw drew drawn sell sold sold
dream dreamed/dreamt dreamed/dreamt send sent sent
drink drank drunk show showed shown
drive drove driven shut shut shut
eat ate eaten sing sang sung
fall fell fallen sit sat sat
feel felt felt sleep slept slept
find found found speak spoke spoken
fly flew flown spell spelled/spelt spelled/spelt
forget forgot forgotten spend spent spent
get got got stand stood stood
give gave given steal stole stolen
go went gone/been swim swam swum
grow grew grown take took taken
have had had teach taught taught
hear heard heard tell told told
hit hit hit think thought thought
hold held held throw threw thrown
hurt hurt hurt understand understood understood
keep kept kept wake woke woken
know knew known wear wore worn
learn learned/learnt learned/learnt win won won
leave left left write wrote written
IRREGULAR VERBS 151

Acknowledgements Blend Images; georgeclerk/E+; Tarzhanova/iStock/Getty
Images Plus; akiyoko/iStock/Getty Images Plus; Andy Crawford;
The authors would like to thank all the editors who worked on the arkady2013/iStock/Getty Images Plus; Ruth Jenkinson/
project for their hard work. Dorling Kindersley; Customdesigner/iStock/Getty Images Plus;
The authors and publishers are grateful to the following for Pannonia/E+; doomu/iStock/Getty Images Plus; Ableimages/
reviewing the material during the writing process: David Harrigan; filo/E+; C2: DGLimages/iStock/Getty Images
Plus; Hero Images; U7: Anthony Lee/OJO Images; Hero Images;
Argentina: Diana Ogando; Italy: Ilaria Longhi; Mexico: Gabriela Ben Welsh/Corbis; GibsonPictures/E+; ultramarinfoto/iStock/
Navidad; Spain: John Hayward; Turkey: Souad Alsayyed Getty Images Plus; Onne van der Wal/Corbis Documentary;
The authors and publishers acknowledge the following akrp/E+; SolStock/E+; Monikah Wiseman/EyeEm; Geri Lavrov/
sources of copyright material and are grateful for the Photographer’s Choice; Adam Burton/robertharding; jonpic/
permissions granted. While every effort has been made, it E+; Christine Balderas/Photodisc; TEK IMAGE/Science Photo
has not always been possible to identify the sources of all Library; nikitabuida/ iStock/Getty Images Plus; hudiemm/
the material used, or to trace all copyright holders. If any E+; Grassetto/iStock/Getty Images Plus; Bluemoon Stock/
omissions are brought to our notice, we will be happy to Stockbyte; kiruk/iStock/Getty Images Plus; Believe_In_Me/
include the appropriate acknowledgements on reprinting and iStock/Getty Images Plus; Richard Villalonundefined undefined/
in the next update to the digital edition, as applicable. iStock/Getty Images Plus; Piotr Polaczyk/ iStock/Getty Images
Plus; gopfaster/iStock/Getty Images Plus; Steve Gorton and
Key: U = Unit, LS = Life Skills, C = Culture, R = Review, Andy Crawford/Dorling Kindersley; GomezDavid/iStock/Getty
PE = Prepare for the Exam Images Plus; U8: Maskot; Daniel Schoenen/LOOK-foto; Holly
Text Hildreth/Moment; Walter Leporati/Scott McPartland/Archive
U16: Susanna Zaraysky for the text about Susanna Zaraysky Photos; LS2: Andreas Stamm; DGLimages/iStock/Getty Images
website, createyourworldbook.com. Copyright © Susanna Plus; U9: Hero Images; digitalhallway/E+; Dirk Steuerwald/
Zaraysky. Reproduced with kind permission; C5: Excerpt from LOOK; PeopleImages/DigitalVision; oleg66/E+; Jupiterimages/
WONDER by R. J. Palacio. Copyright © 2012 R. J. Palacio. Used Stockbyte; DragonImages/iStock/Getty Images Plus; Russell
by permission of Alfred A. Knopf, an imprint of Random House Underwood/Corbis/Getty Images Plus; Thomas Barwick/Stone;
Children’s Books, a division of Penguin Random House LLC. All ultramarinfoto/E+; PeopleImages/E+; Douglas Sacha/Moment;
rights reserved; Trident Media Group, LLC for the text about R. medlar/E+; Erik Isakson; heshphoto/Image Source; Daxus/E+;
J. Palacio. Copyright © Trident Media Group, LLC. Reproduced Daniel Shirey/Getty Images Sport; Kevin C. Cox/Getty Images
with kind permission; U20: Kevin Pearce for the text about Kevin Sport; VI Images/Getty Images Sport; Kuruneko/iStock/Getty
Pearce. Copyright © Kevin Pearce. Reproduced with permission; Images Plus; Upklyak, Freepik. U10: Hero Images; Juanmonino/
PE: Luke Thill for the text about Luke Thill. Copyright © Luke E+; Rob Lewine; princessdlaf/E+; mustafahacalaki/DigitalVision
Thill. Reproduced with kind permission of Greg Thill and Angie Vectors; Vicky Kasala/Photodi; Nancy Brown/The Image Bank;
Thill. drbimages/E; Erik Von Weber/Stone; C3: Steve Debenport/
E+; MacGregor/Topical Press/Hulton Archive; Bongarts; Eric
Photography Verhoeven/Soccrates Images/Getty Images Sport; U11: Andia/
The following images are sourced from Getty Images. Universal Images Group; altrendo travel/Stockbyte; simonlong/
U1: monkeybusinessimages/iStock/Getty Images Plus; Moment; Travelpix Ltd/Photographer’s Choice; James Balston/
PeopleImages/DigitalVision; Hero Images; Gabriel Visintin/ ArcaidImages; Flory/iStock/Getty Images Plus; View Pictures/
EyeEm; Hill Street Studios/Blend Images; Neustockimages/ Universal Images Group; Chris Mellor/Lonely Planet Images;
E+; U2: Antonio Zanghì/Moment; Neil Holmes/VisitBritain; Yongyuan Dai/The Image Bank; by CaoWei/Moment; Tetra
Nico De Pasquale Photography/DigitalVision; Yustinus/RooM; Images; Julian Elliott Photography/Photolibrary; U12: Visual
Mauro Ladu; Anna Gorin/Moment; lenzjona/iStock/Getty Images China Group; ozgurcankaya/E+; nkbimages/Getty Images;
Plus; Diane Cook and Len Jenshel/Stone; Alexander Bennett/ isitsharp/Getty Images; Jamie Grill; U13: Eric Audras/ONOKY;
EyeEm; mikroman6/Moment; Kiyoshi Hijiki/Moment; VCG/ Westend61; Jeff Greenough/Blend Images; Pulp Photography/
Visual China Group; Cameris/iStock/Getty Images Plus; Kenneth Stockbyte; Afton Almaraz/Taxi; John & Lisa Merrill/Stockbyte;
Canning/E+; Visuals Unlimited, Inc./Robert Pickett; AndreAnita/ Copyright Zoe Chipperfield/Moment Open; Alfredo But/EyeEm;
iStock/Getty Images Plus; Rpsych/E+; Daniel Pankoke/EyeEm; Ariel Skelley/DigitalVision; kate_sept2004/E+; Victor Chavez/
guenterguni/iStock/Getty Images Plus; Ger Bosma/Moment; WireImage; Dougal Waters/DigitalVision; guruXOOX/iStock/Getty
Fotosearch; throughmyviewfinder - Peter C Braddock/Moment Images Plus; Maica/iStock/Getty Images Plus; eggeeggjiew/
Open; Robin Bush/Oxford Scientific; mrtom-uk/iStock/Getty iStock/Getty Images Plus; Manuel Breva Colmeiro/Moment;
Images Plus; C1: Photo by James Keith/Moment Open; Diana U14: David Miller/EyeEm; labsas/iStock/Getty Images Plus;
Robinson Photography/Moment; Grant Faint/Photolibrary; Jeff Greenberg/Universal Images Group; jacqueline harriet,
Allison Achauer/Moment; Chris Robbins/Photodisc; BirdofPrey/ photographer/Moment; Ken Welsh/Perspectives; Steve Prezant/
E+; JasonDBrown/iStock Editorial/Getty Images Plus; Globe Corbis; Spaces Images/Blend Images; luanateutzi/iStock/
Turner, LLC; WIN-Initiative; U3: EduLeite/iStock/Getty Images Getty Images Plus; Alexander Palm/EyeEm; Joe_Potato/
Plus; Linas Krisiukenas/EyeEm; william87/iStock/Getty Images iStock/Getty Images Plus; Nodar Chernishev/EyeEm Premium;
Plus; Rainer Dittrich; Jason Langley/robertharding; BROOK michaelpuche/iStock/Getty Images Plus; JGI/Jamie Grill/
PIFER/DigitalVision; Holger Leue/Lonely Planet Images; William Blend Images; pecaphoto77/iStock/Getty Images Plus; nickpo/
Manning/Corbis Documentary; rapier/iStock Editorial/Getty iStock/Getty Images Plus; Artfully79/iStock/Getty Images Plus;
Images Plus; FS-Stock/iStock/Getty Images Plus; Tholer/ Charlie Drevstam; Susanna Price/Dorling Kindersley; Richard
iStock/Getty Images Plus; Francesco Vaninetti Photo/Moment; Drury/DigitalVision; Paul Bradbury/OJO Images; C4: Cultura
sborisov/iStock/Getty Images Plus; koromelena/iStock Editorial/ RM Exclusive/WALTER ZERLA; Rudi Van Starrex/Photolibrary;
Getty Images Plus; Amith Nag Photography/Moment; Lingxiao Jon Boyes/Canopy; Eurasia Press/Photononstop; TkKurikawa/
Xie/Moment Unreleased; Yuri Kadobnov/AFP; U4: pamspix/ iStock Editorial/Getty Images Plus; Jason Kempin/FilmMagic;
E+; nedomacki/iStock Editorial/Getty Images Plus; Koichi typhoonski/iStock Editorial/Getty Images Plus; U15: Chris Ryan/
Kamoshida/Getty Images News; Khrizmo/iStock/Getty Images OJO Images; skynesher/E+; Vicky Kasala Productions/Photodisc;
Plus; LS1: IMAGEMORE Co, Ltd.; David Young-Wolff/The leaf/iStock/Getty Images Plus; tirc83/E+; Mordolff/E+; Betsie Van
Image Bank; U5: asiseeit/E+; Fuse/Corbis; Westend61; U6: der Meer/Stone; Westend61; LeventKonuk/iStock/Getty Images
ozanuysal/iStock/Getty Images Plus; reportman1985/iStock/ Plus; Thomas Barwick/Iconica; Sirinarth Mekvorawuth/EyeEm;
Getty Images Plus; hidesy/iStock/Getty Images Plus; Neyya/ mrPliskin/E+; Qvasimodo/iStock/Getty Images Plus; calvindexter/
iStock/Getty Images Plus; De Agostini/G. Dagli Orti/De; Agostini DigitalVision Vectors; LS4: gawrav/Vetta; Chanayut Sansri/
Picture Library; Hugh Threlfall/Photolibrary; s-cphoto/iStock/ EyeEm; R4: Barry Winiker/Photolibrary; Tom Hopkins/Aurora; Jon
Getty Images Plus; Radionphoto/iStock/Getty Images Plus; Boyes/Canopy; Neil Setchfield/Lonely Planet Images; Nikada/E+;
Mandrixta/iStock/Getty Images Plus; kickers/E+; Marc Romanelli/ Dave
O‘ZBEKISTON BARKAMOLLIK UCHUN TA’LIM DASTURI
• Enjoy interactive, personalised lessons with themes and

resources relevant to school-aged learners
• Create confident English users with our enhanced

vocabulary and grammar syllabus
• Inspire learners to expand their horizons and knowledge

exploring Prepare’s Life Skills and Culture sections
Ushbu kitob AQSh xalqaro taraqqiyot agentligi (USAID) orqali Amerika xalqining qoʻllab-quvvatlashi
yordamida tayyorlangan. Kitobdagi fikr va mulohazalar USAID yoki AQSh hukumati qarashlarini aks ettirmaydi.
What is Better Learning?

Insights
It’s a continuous cycle where our insights
Content shape content that drives results.
Building brighter futures together

Results
Find out more at: cambridge.org/betterlearning

(Teacherscom - Library) EFL Grade 9 SB

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

(Teacherscom - Library) EFL Grade 9 SB

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

(Teacherscom - Library) EFL Grade 9 SB

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Grade 9

Cambridge University Press

Maroqli ta’lim oling!

O‘zbekiston Respublikasi Xalq ta’limi vazirligi

Ministry of Public Education of the Republic of Uzbekistan

Extra activities 120

Culture National Parks page 18

3 ON HOLIDAY Holidays: Ways of Past simple First holidays with friends

4 MY PLACE Homes Past continuous and past A new home

5 SCHOOL School subjects Comparative and New ways of learning

6 FAVOURITE THINGS Materials Possession Special memories

Culture Secondary school in the UK page 40

7 ADVENTURE Holiday activities Present continuous for Brecon Beacons adventure

10 USEFUL WEBSITES Relationships Verb patterns: gerunds Teen troubles

Culture The beautiful game page 62

A conversation about animals An article about an

Glacier National Park

Five short conversations A description of a home Homes

An interview about Describing your perfect School subjects

Asking people about their Adjective order

High school in the US

An interview about homes of too, also, as well Time capsule

A conversation about eSports Talking about eSports Games

Young app developers talk An email

14 SPENDING MONEY Shops Present perfect with just, York Times

17 STAYING HEALTHY Body parts Reflexive pronouns Accident!

Culture English Literature page 106

19 DIFFERENT Words to describe cooking Present simple passive Breakfast cereals

Life Skills Study skills: Taking exams page 116

Extra activities page 120

Vocabulary list page 124

Grammar reference and practice page 131

A conversation about a An email

Five short conversations Giving advice Health

A talk about a reading A story

How teens read

A conversation about a A biography

ABOUT YOU 3 Check the meaning of the words in the emails

1 Complete the table with examples of the present

From: Daniel Present simple Present continuous

GRAMMAR REFERENCE AND PRACTICE PAGE 131

3 Choose the correct form of the verb.

5 Work with a partner. Look at the photos on page 10.

She’s playing the guitar.

I never play the guitar, but

6 Imagine you are writing an email like Grace’s and

Now write your email.

YOUR LEADER: MR JONES

READING VOCABULARY Personal details

What’s your email address?

VOCABULARY AND READING

1 In pairs, discuss the questions. Then read the

2 Read the article again and choose the best

these changes are very slow and others are quick.

north ​other ​ south ​ GRAMMAR REFERENCE AND PRACTICE PAGE 132

8 In groups of four, listen to each others’ sentences.

5 Use the prompts to write questions beginning

In pairs, discuss what you found out.

Our changing planet 15

north other south GRAMMAR REFERENCE AND PRACTICE PAGE 132